1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
127 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
132 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
159 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
160 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
162 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
163 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
165 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
166 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
167 \author 274215730 "scott"
168 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
169 \author 1549938239 "Kornel Benko"
170 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
181 by the \SpecialChar LyX
186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
188 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
189 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
190 Documentation mailing list:
191 \begin_inset CommandInset href
193 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
205 \begin_inset Newline newline
209 \begin_inset Newline newline
213 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
215 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
219 \begin_inset Note Note
222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
223 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
224 \begin_inset Newline newline
229 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
237 \begin_layout Standard
238 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
239 LatexCommand tableofcontents
246 \begin_layout Chapter
250 \begin_layout Section
251 What is \SpecialChar LyX
255 \begin_layout Standard
257 is a document preparation system.
258 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
259 scripts, publishable books, business
260 letters and proposals,
261 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
265 It is unlike most other
266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
273 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
275 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
291 pt type, left justified, 5
292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
301 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
305 \begin_layout Standard
306 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
311 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
315 \begin_layout Standard
320 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
321 's philosophy: most importantly,
322 the format of all of the manuals.
323 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
324 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
325 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
328 \begin_layout Section
333 \begin_layout Standard
334 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
335 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
337 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
338 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
342 \begin_layout Standard
343 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
344 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
345 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
347 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
348 only a vertical scrollbar.
351 \begin_layout Standard
352 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
353 The first case is large images.
354 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
355 the image and use the option
366 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
369 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
372 \begin_layout Standard
373 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
374 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
382 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
389 \begin_layout Section
393 \begin_layout Standard
394 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
396 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
398 Just select the manual you want to read from the
405 \begin_layout Section
406 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
410 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
417 \begin_layout Standard
418 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
419 can be configured via the menu
421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
425 \begin_inset Index idx
428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
435 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
437 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
438 packages are available.
439 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
441 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
442 was installed on your system,
443 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
448 \begin_inset space \space{}
451 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
452 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
454 To force \SpecialChar LyX
455 to re-inspect your system use
457 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
461 \begin_inset Index idx
464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
465 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
471 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
472 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
475 \begin_layout Section
478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
480 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
487 \begin_layout Standard
488 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
489 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
490 installed but you will not be
492 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
493 or print your documents
497 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
498 Some \SpecialChar LyX
499 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
508 which can produce PDFs and the like.
511 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
513 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
516 every \SpecialChar LyX
517 document can still be output as plain text
518 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
524 \begin_layout Standard
525 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
527 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
531 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
532 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
535 \begin_layout Standard
536 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
537 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
538 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
541 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
549 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
550 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
553 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
557 \begin_inset Index idx
560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
561 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
569 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
576 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
580 \begin_layout Chapter
581 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
585 \begin_layout Section
586 Basic File Operations
587 \begin_inset Index idx
590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
599 \begin_layout Standard
604 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
605 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
608 \begin_layout Itemize
630 \begin_layout Itemize
646 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
652 \begin_layout Itemize
674 \begin_layout Itemize
682 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
686 \begin_layout Itemize
688 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
700 \begin_layout Itemize
712 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
716 \begin_layout Itemize
718 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
726 \begin_layout Itemize
748 \begin_layout Itemize
760 arg "buffer-write-as"
764 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
768 \begin_layout Itemize
770 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
782 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202805
786 \begin_layout Itemize
788 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202811
796 \begin_layout Itemize
810 \begin_layout Itemize
824 \begin_layout Standard
825 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
826 few minor differences.
829 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
840 command lists the available templates.
841 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
842 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
843 and possibly propose text fragments
845 for the document, features
846 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
849 you would otherwise need to
850 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
852 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
856 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
860 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
868 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
874 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
875 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
879 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
887 \begin_layout Standard
888 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
920 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
921 to open a file or create a new one, that big
922 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
926 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
930 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
941 \begin_layout Standard
963 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
965 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
968 people work on the same document at the same time.
972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
973 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
976 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
981 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
982 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
984 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
986 \begin_inset Flex Emph
989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
991 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
992 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
1001 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1006 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1014 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1034 will reload the document from disk.
1035 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1036 and want to restore it to the last save
1037 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1044 \begin_inset space ~
1049 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1050 them as your changes.
1053 \begin_layout Section
1054 Basic Editing Features
1055 \begin_inset Index idx
1058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1067 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1074 \begin_layout Standard
1075 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1076 can perform cut and paste operations
1077 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1078 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1079 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1080 editing features and how to access
1082 We will start with cut and paste.
1085 \begin_layout Standard
1086 As you might expect, the
1090 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1091 various other editing features.
1092 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1096 \begin_layout Itemize
1102 \begin_inset Index idx
1105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1134 \begin_layout Itemize
1140 \begin_inset Index idx
1143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1172 \begin_layout Itemize
1178 \begin_inset Index idx
1181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1206 \begin_layout Itemize
1210 \begin_inset space ~
1216 \begin_layout Itemize
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1226 \begin_layout Itemize
1230 \begin_inset space ~
1234 \begin_inset space ~
1240 \begin_inset Index idx
1243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1252 \begin_inset Index idx
1255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1270 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1280 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1286 \begin_layout Standard
1287 The first three are self-explanatory.
1288 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1289 and other programs using
1310 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1311 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1316 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1317 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1318 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1319 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1320 into individual cells.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1330 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1334 \begin_layout Standard
1338 \begin_inset space ~
1343 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1345 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1347 \begin_inset space ~
1354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1360 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1361 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1362 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1368 \begin_inset space \space{}
1371 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1372 text which is often meaningless.)
1375 \begin_layout Standard
1379 \begin_inset space ~
1382 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1384 \begin_inset space ~
1388 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1401 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1402 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1403 is inserted as one paragraph.
1404 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1408 \begin_inset space ~
1413 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1414 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1420 \begin_inset space ~
1423 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1429 \begin_inset space ~
1437 \begin_inset space ~
1440 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1443 paste from the primary selection.
1444 This is normally the currently selected text.
1447 \begin_layout Standard
1450 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1452 \begin_inset space ~
1456 \begin_inset space ~
1464 \begin_inset space ~
1468 \begin_inset space ~
1474 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1476 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1480 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1483 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1488 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1491 \begin_inset space ~
1502 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1504 \begin_inset space ~
1508 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1510 \begin_inset space ~
1518 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1532 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1536 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1540 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1544 \begin_inset space ~
1556 arg "word-find-backward"
1559 shortcut) to search backwards
1563 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
1564 Even if you close the widget,
1573 arg "word-find-backward"
1576 will search further.
1581 \begin_layout Standard
1583 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
1588 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1591 \begin_inset space ~
1596 field and searches the next match.
1602 \begin_inset space ~
1607 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1609 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
1611 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
1615 \begin_layout Standard
1617 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
1618 Furthermore, the following options are available:
1621 \begin_layout Itemize
1624 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
1630 \begin_inset space ~
1636 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
1639 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
1640 If the toggle is set, searching for
1641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1652 will not match the word
1653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1666 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
1670 \begin_layout Itemize
1673 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
1677 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
1681 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
1686 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1687 to only find complete words, e.
1688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1692 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1721 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
1725 \begin_layout Itemize
1728 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
1733 will limit search and replace, or replace all, to the current cursor selection.
1736 \begin_layout Itemize
1739 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
1744 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input, without pressing the
1748 \begin_inset space ~
1756 \begin_layout Itemize
1758 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
1763 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has
1764 been reached without asking.
1765 If this is not checked, a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
1766 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
1767 so you need to put it back manually.
1770 \begin_layout Standard
1771 \paragraph_spacing single
1773 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1774 The widget also has a
1778 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search
1779 widget), hiding replace and options.
1781 \change_deleted 630872221 1620400535
1783 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1788 button brings you back to the full size.
1791 \begin_layout Standard
1792 \paragraph_spacing single
1795 also offers an advanced
1798 \begin_inset space ~
1802 \begin_inset space ~
1807 feature that is described in section
1808 \begin_inset space ~
1812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1814 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1821 \begin_layout Standard
1822 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1823 \begin_inset space \space{}
1827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1835 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1837 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1842 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1849 \begin_layout Standard
1853 arg "inset-select-all"
1856 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1857 When the cursor is inside an inset
1860 arg "inset-select-all"
1863 selects the content of the inset.
1867 arg "inset-select-all"
1870 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1871 then to the whole document.
1875 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1878 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1882 \begin_layout Section
1884 \begin_inset Index idx
1887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1894 \begin_inset Index idx
1897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1906 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1913 \begin_layout Standard
1914 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1916 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1919 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1922 or the toolbar button
1929 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1931 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1934 or the toolbar button
1941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1948 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1949 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1952 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1955 \begin_layout Standard
1957 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
1958 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1967 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1968 This is a consequence of the 100
1969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1972 step undo limit mentioned above.
1975 \begin_layout Standard
1984 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1986 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1990 \begin_layout Section
1992 \begin_inset Index idx
1995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2004 \begin_layout Standard
2005 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2008 \begin_layout Enumerate
2013 \begin_layout Itemize
2018 once anywhere in the edit window.
2019 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2023 \begin_layout Enumerate
2028 \begin_layout Itemize
2035 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2038 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2041 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2042 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2044 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2045 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
2051 \begin_layout Itemize
2052 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2055 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2062 \begin_layout Enumerate
2063 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
2067 \begin_layout Standard
2068 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2069 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2073 \begin_layout Section
2075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2077 name "sec:Navigating"
2082 \begin_inset Index idx
2085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2094 \begin_layout Standard
2096 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2099 \begin_layout Itemize
2104 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
2105 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2108 \begin_layout Itemize
2109 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
2111 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2113 \begin_inset space ~
2118 or by the toolbar button
2121 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2127 \begin_layout Itemize
2128 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2130 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2133 and use the same menu to return to them.
2134 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2137 \begin_layout Standard
2141 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2146 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2147 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2149 \begin_inset space ~
2154 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2155 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
2156 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
2157 last editing position.
2160 \begin_layout Standard
2165 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2169 \begin_layout Subsection
2171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2173 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2178 \begin_inset Index idx
2181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2182 Navigating ! Outline
2188 \begin_inset Index idx
2191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2200 \begin_layout Standard
2201 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
2202 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
2203 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
2204 \begin_inset space ~
2208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2210 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2214 ), notes, or citations (see section
2215 \begin_inset space ~
2219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2221 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2226 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2230 \begin_layout Standard
2231 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2232 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2233 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2234 dialog and to modify the citation.
2237 \begin_layout Standard
2242 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2243 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2245 Labels and References
2247 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2256 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2259 \begin_layout Standard
2260 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2261 control the display.
2266 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2267 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2272 option keeps it in the current view state.
2273 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2274 \begin_inset space ~
2277 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2278 \begin_inset space ~
2281 3, the subsections of sections
2282 \begin_inset space ~
2285 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2290 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2291 \begin_inset space ~
2295 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2305 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2308 \begin_layout Standard
2315 button refreshes the TOC (
2316 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2318 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2322 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2324 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2328 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2332 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2336 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2340 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2342 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2346 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2348 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2352 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2354 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2358 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2362 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2364 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2368 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2372 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2376 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2380 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2384 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2388 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2392 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2396 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2398 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2402 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2416 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2417 For example, you can move section
2418 \begin_inset space ~
2422 \begin_inset space ~
2425 2.4 or after section
2426 \begin_inset space ~
2431 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2444 (or the corresponding key bindings
2452 ) you can change the level of sections.
2453 You can make section
2454 \begin_inset space ~
2458 \begin_inset space ~
2462 \begin_inset space ~
2468 \begin_layout Standard
2469 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2470 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2473 \begin_layout Subsection
2474 Horizontal Scrolling
2475 \begin_inset Index idx
2478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2479 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2487 \begin_layout Standard
2489 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2491 \begin_inset space ~
2494 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2495 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2496 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2500 \begin_layout Standard
2501 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2505 \begin_layout Itemize
2507 is used on a small tablet computer
2510 \begin_layout Itemize
2511 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2523 \begin_inset space ~
2536 \begin_layout Itemize
2537 Math constructs with long command names
2540 \begin_layout Standard
2541 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2542 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2544 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2545 window so that table
2546 \begin_inset space ~
2550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2552 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2557 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2559 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2560 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2563 \begin_layout Standard
2564 \begin_inset Float table
2571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2572 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2577 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2581 Horizontal scrolling test.
2589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2591 \begin_inset Tabular
2592 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2593 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2594 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2595 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2596 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2638 \begin_layout Section
2639 Input/Word Completion
2640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2642 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2647 \begin_inset Index idx
2650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2657 \begin_inset Index idx
2660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2691 \begin_layout Standard
2693 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2695 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2696 is used to propose completions.
2699 \begin_layout Standard
2700 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2703 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2708 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2715 \begin_inset space ~
2719 \begin_inset space ~
2724 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2728 \begin_inset space ~
2733 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2734 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2738 \begin_inset space ~
2744 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2745 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2746 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2747 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2750 \begin_layout Standard
2752 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2753 completions available.
2758 key to accept a proposed completion.
2759 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2760 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2761 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2764 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2771 \begin_layout Standard
2772 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2773 ing options for text.
2775 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2777 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2779 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2782 he special math option
2786 enables characters to be composed.
2788 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2790 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2794 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2797 you want to insert the character
2798 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2802 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2805 input the characters
2806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2818 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2820 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2824 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2826 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2831 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2833 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2836 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2839 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2841 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2844 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2849 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2851 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2855 's installation folder.
2857 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2858 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2865 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2870 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2871 In the example above,
2876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2908 \begin_layout Section
2910 \begin_inset Index idx
2913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2920 \begin_inset Index idx
2923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2952 \begin_inset Index idx
2955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2986 \begin_layout Standard
2987 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3001 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3004 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3008 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3009 \begin_inset space ~
3013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3015 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3022 \begin_layout Standard
3026 \begin_inset space ~
3034 \begin_inset space ~
3055 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
3059 \begin_layout Labeling
3060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3064 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3065 LatexCommand nomenclature
3067 description "Tabulator key"
3074 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3076 If you do not understand this, go read sections
3077 \begin_inset space ~
3081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3083 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3090 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3094 , especially section
3095 \begin_inset space ~
3099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3101 reference "subsec:Lists"
3107 If you are still confused, look in the
3112 \begin_inset Newline newline
3120 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
3121 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
3125 \begin_layout Labeling
3126 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3130 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3131 LatexCommand nomenclature
3133 description "Escape key"
3141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3148 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
3149 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3152 \begin_layout Labeling
3153 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3158 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
3159 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
3163 \begin_layout Standard
3164 There are three modifier keys:
3167 \begin_layout Labeling
3168 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3186 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3187 LatexCommand nomenclature
3189 description "Control key"
3194 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
3195 on which keys it is used in combination with:
3199 \begin_layout Itemize
3208 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3211 \begin_layout Itemize
3220 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3223 \begin_layout Itemize
3232 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3236 \begin_layout Labeling
3237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3255 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3256 LatexCommand nomenclature
3258 description "Shift key"
3263 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3264 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3267 \begin_layout Labeling
3268 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3286 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3287 LatexCommand nomenclature
3289 description "Alt or Meta key"
3294 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3295 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3296 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3302 \begin_inset Newline newline
3305 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3307 menu accelerator keys
3310 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3311 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3315 \begin_layout Standard
3316 For example, the sequence
3317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3323 \begin_inset space ~
3327 \begin_inset space ~
3333 \begin_inset space ~
3341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3360 \begin_inset space ~
3366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3376 \begin_layout Standard
3381 manual lists all other things bound to the
3389 \begin_layout Standard
3390 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3392 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3394 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3395 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3397 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3398 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3399 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3401 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3417 followed by a capital
3424 \begin_layout Chapter
3427 \begin_inset Index idx
3430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3440 \begin_layout Section
3442 \begin_inset Index idx
3445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3454 \begin_layout Subsection
3458 \begin_layout Standard
3459 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3460 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3461 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3462 numbering schemes, and so on.
3463 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3464 and format the title of your document differently.
3467 \begin_layout Standard
3472 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3473 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3474 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3475 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3476 picks one for you by default.
3477 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3480 \begin_layout Subsection
3482 \begin_inset Index idx
3485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3494 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3501 \begin_layout Standard
3502 You can select a class using the
3504 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3505 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3509 \begin_inset Index idx
3512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3519 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3523 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3527 \begin_layout Standard
3528 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3533 \begin_layout Description
3534 Article for basic articles
3537 \begin_layout Description
3538 Report for basic reports
3541 \begin_layout Description
3542 Book for writing a book
3545 \begin_layout Description
3546 Letter for US-style letters
3549 \begin_layout Standard
3550 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3551 only uses if you have installed
3552 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3553 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3554 distributions will include
3556 Here are some of the classes.
3557 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3559 Special Document Classes
3568 \begin_layout Description
3569 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3572 \begin_layout Description
3573 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3577 \begin_layout Description
3578 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3582 \begin_layout Description
3583 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3584 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3585 There are three article layouts available.
3586 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3587 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3588 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3589 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3594 sequential numbering
3595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3598 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3599 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3600 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3601 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3604 \begin_layout Description
3605 Beamer Layout for presentations
3608 \begin_layout Description
3609 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3610 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3611 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3612 with \SpecialChar LyX
3616 \begin_layout Description
3617 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3620 \begin_layout Description
3622 \begin_inset space ~
3625 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3628 \begin_layout Description
3629 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3632 \begin_layout Description
3633 Foils Used to make transparencies
3636 \begin_layout Description
3637 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3638 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3639 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3640 with \SpecialChar LyX
3644 \begin_layout Description
3645 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3646 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3649 \begin_layout Description
3650 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3653 \begin_layout Description
3654 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3657 \begin_layout Description
3658 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3659 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3660 (Is used by this document.)
3663 \begin_layout Description
3664 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3667 \begin_layout Description
3668 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3671 \begin_layout Description
3676 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3677 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3679 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3683 \begin_layout Description
3684 Slides Used to make transparencies
3687 \begin_layout Description
3689 \begin_inset space ~
3692 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3693 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3696 \begin_layout Description
3697 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3700 \begin_layout Standard
3701 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3703 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3705 Special Document Classes
3712 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3713 of the document classes.
3716 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3720 \begin_layout Standard
3721 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3723 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3724 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3726 \begin_inset Index idx
3729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3746 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3747 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3749 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3752 \begin_layout Standard
3755 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3760 , are highly specialized.
3762 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3763 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3764 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3765 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3766 by some document class.
3767 There are just too many of them.
3768 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3771 \begin_layout Standard
3772 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3780 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3781 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3782 document class for a new file.
3784 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3787 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3794 manual for information on how to install them.
3795 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3801 \begin_layout Standard
3802 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3803 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3804 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3805 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3806 class files to be used for dissertation
3807 s submitted to those universities.
3808 The \SpecialChar LyX
3809 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3811 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3815 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3821 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3824 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3828 name "subsec:Modules"
3833 \begin_inset Index idx
3836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3845 \begin_layout Standard
3846 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3847 chosen document class.
3848 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3849 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3856 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3860 \begin_inset Index idx
3863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3870 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3874 \begin_layout Standard
3875 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3876 packages or file format converters that are not always
3877 installed by default.
3879 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3880 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3881 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3882 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3884 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3885 file without the missing prerequisites.
3886 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3887 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3890 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3894 \begin_inset Index idx
3897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3898 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3905 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3909 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3913 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3922 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3924 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3935 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3938 \begin_layout Standard
3939 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3947 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3949 will advise you about these things.
3957 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3961 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3966 \begin_inset Index idx
3969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3970 Document ! Local Layout
3978 \begin_layout Standard
3979 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3980 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3981 : They are intended to be used in
3982 a variety of different documents.
3983 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3984 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3985 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3986 need a specific inset or
3987 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3989 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3992 style only that one time.
3993 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3995 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4013 manual for information on how to use it.
4016 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4020 \begin_layout Standard
4021 Each class has a default set of options.
4022 Here's a quick table describing them:
4025 \begin_layout Standard
4026 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4032 \begin_layout Standard
4034 \begin_inset Tabular
4035 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4036 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4037 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4038 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4039 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4040 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4041 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4495 \begin_layout Standard
4496 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4502 \begin_layout Standard
4503 You're probably also wondering what
4504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4508 \begin_inset space ~
4512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4516 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4517 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4522 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4527 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4537 headings, there are also
4545 headings, and so on.
4546 We will describe these headings fully in section
4547 \begin_inset space ~
4551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4553 reference "subsec:Headings"
4560 \begin_layout Subsection
4562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4564 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4569 \begin_inset Index idx
4572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4579 \begin_inset Index idx
4582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4591 \begin_layout Standard
4592 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4594 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4601 \begin_inset space ~
4609 \begin_inset space ~
4614 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4616 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4617 doesn't support special options you want to
4618 use for your document.
4619 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4620 -class and its options, you have to read
4624 \begin_layout Standard
4626 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4630 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4634 \begin_inset space ~
4641 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4647 \begin_inset space ~
4652 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4653 You can choose between the following five options:
4656 \begin_layout Labeling
4657 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4662 Use default page style of current class.
4665 \begin_layout Labeling
4666 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4671 No page numbers or headings.
4674 \begin_layout Labeling
4675 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4683 \begin_layout Labeling
4684 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4689 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4690 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4691 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4692 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4695 \begin_layout Labeling
4696 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4701 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4702 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4708 \begin_inset Index idx
4711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4719 How they are defined is explained in section
4720 \begin_inset space ~
4724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4726 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4733 \begin_layout Standard
4734 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4735 \begin_inset space ~
4739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4741 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4748 \begin_layout Subsection
4749 Paper Size and Orientation
4750 \begin_inset Index idx
4753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4754 Document ! Paper size
4760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4762 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4769 \begin_layout Standard
4770 You can find the following options in the menu
4773 \begin_inset space ~
4780 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4784 \begin_inset Index idx
4787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4796 \begin_layout Labeling
4797 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4801 \begin_inset space ~
4806 What size paper to print on.
4811 \begin_layout Itemize
4817 \begin_layout Itemize
4823 \begin_layout Itemize
4829 \begin_layout Itemize
4835 \begin_layout Itemize
4838 US letter, US legal, US executive
4841 \begin_layout Itemize
4847 \begin_layout Itemize
4854 \begin_layout Labeling
4855 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4860 To choose whether to output as
4871 \begin_layout Labeling
4872 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4876 \begin_inset space ~
4881 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4882 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4885 \begin_layout Subsection
4887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4889 name "subsec:Margins"
4894 \begin_inset Index idx
4897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4904 \begin_inset Index idx
4907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4916 \begin_layout Standard
4917 Paper margins are set in the menu
4919 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4923 \begin_inset Index idx
4926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4935 \begin_layout Standard
4936 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4937 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4938 the paper format and the font size into account.
4941 \begin_layout Subsection
4945 \begin_layout Standard
4946 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4947 has to convert everything into the new
4949 That includes the paragraph environments.
4950 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4951 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4952 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4954 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4963 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4965 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4966 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4967 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4970 \begin_layout Section
4971 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4972 \begin_inset Index idx
4975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4976 Paragraph ! Indentation
4984 \begin_layout Subsection
4986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4988 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4995 \begin_layout Standard
4996 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4997 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5000 \begin_layout Standard
5001 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5002 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5003 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5004 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5008 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
5014 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5015 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
5016 language than English.
5018 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5021 \begin_layout Standard
5022 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
5023 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
5024 into \SpecialChar LyX
5026 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5029 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
5031 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
5032 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
5033 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
5038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5040 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5041 goes to produce a printable file.
5046 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5048 gives you the ability globally to change
5052 these pre-coded spacings.
5053 We will explain more later.
5056 \begin_layout Subsection
5057 Paragraph Separation
5058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5060 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5065 \begin_inset Index idx
5068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5069 Paragraph ! Separation
5077 \begin_layout Standard
5085 \begin_inset space ~
5093 \begin_inset space ~
5100 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5104 \begin_inset Index idx
5107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5113 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
5116 \begin_layout Subsection
5120 \begin_layout Standard
5121 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5124 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5126 \begin_inset space ~
5131 dialog and toggle the
5134 \begin_inset space ~
5139 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5142 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5146 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
5147 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
5151 \begin_layout Standard
5152 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
5153 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5156 \begin_layout Subsection
5158 \begin_inset Index idx
5161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5162 Paragraph ! Line spacing
5170 \begin_layout Standard
5173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5177 \begin_inset Index idx
5180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5189 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5193 \begin_inset space ~
5202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5203 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5209 \begin_inset Index idx
5212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5219 installed to use this feature.
5224 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5226 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5228 \begin_inset space ~
5233 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5234 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5237 \begin_layout Section
5238 Paragraph Environments
5239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5241 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5246 \begin_inset Index idx
5249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5250 Paragraph ! Environments
5256 \begin_inset Index idx
5259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5260 Paragraph environments|(
5268 \begin_layout Subsection
5272 \begin_layout Standard
5273 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5276 \begin_layout Standard
5285 } \SpecialChar ldots
5295 \begin_inset Newline newline
5298 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5300 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5301 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5302 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5311 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5314 \begin_layout Standard
5315 A paragraph environment is simply a
5316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5323 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5324 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5325 scheme, labels, and so on.
5326 Additionally, you can
5327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5334 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5335 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5336 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5337 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5339 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5341 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5344 \begin_layout Standard
5345 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5346 \begin_inset Graphics
5347 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5353 at the left end of the toolbar.
5355 will change the environment of the
5359 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5360 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5361 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5364 \begin_layout Standard
5373 create a new paragraph using the
5377 paragraph environment.
5379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5386 because if you are in one of these environments:
5389 \begin_layout Itemize
5395 \begin_layout Itemize
5401 \begin_layout Itemize
5407 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 \begin_layout Itemize
5419 \begin_layout Itemize
5425 \begin_layout Itemize
5431 \begin_layout Standard
5433 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5437 , rather than resetting it to
5442 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5443 \begin_inset space ~
5447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5449 reference "sec:Nesting"
5456 \begin_layout Subsection
5460 \begin_layout Standard
5461 The default paragraph environment is
5466 It creates a plain paragraph.
5468 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5469 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5470 this manual) are in the
5477 \begin_layout Standard
5478 You can nest a paragraph using the
5482 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5490 \begin_layout Subsection
5492 \begin_inset Index idx
5495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5504 \begin_layout Standard
5505 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5506 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5515 for thanks or contact information.
5516 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5517 places all of this on a separate page
5518 along with today's date.
5519 For other types of documents, the title
5520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5527 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5530 \begin_layout Standard
5532 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5546 Here's how you use them:
5549 \begin_layout Itemize
5550 Put the title of your document in the
5557 \begin_layout Itemize
5558 Put the author name in the
5565 \begin_layout Itemize
5566 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5567 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5573 Note that using this environment is optional.
5574 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5575 will automatically insert today's date.
5576 If you don't want a date, use the option
5578 Suppress default date on front page
5582 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5583 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5585 \begin_inset space ~
5593 \begin_layout Standard
5594 You can use footnotes to insert
5595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5602 or contact information.
5605 \begin_layout Subsection
5607 \begin_inset Index idx
5610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5619 name "subsec:Headings"
5626 \begin_layout Standard
5627 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5629 takes care of the numbering for you.
5632 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5634 \begin_inset Index idx
5637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5638 Section headings ! Numbered
5646 \begin_layout Standard
5647 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5651 \begin_layout Enumerate
5657 \begin_layout Enumerate
5663 \begin_layout Enumerate
5669 \begin_layout Enumerate
5675 \begin_layout Enumerate
5681 \begin_layout Enumerate
5687 \begin_layout Enumerate
5693 \begin_layout Standard
5695 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5696 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5697 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5698 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5700 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5702 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5708 \begin_layout Standard
5709 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5710 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5711 You group the book into chapters.
5713 does a similar grouping:
5716 \begin_layout Itemize
5721 is divided into either
5732 \begin_layout Itemize
5744 \begin_layout Itemize
5756 \begin_layout Itemize
5768 \begin_layout Itemize
5780 \begin_layout Itemize
5792 \begin_layout Standard
5793 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5801 Not all document types use the
5805 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5810 is the top-level heading.
5818 \begin_layout Standard
5823 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5824 labels it with its number,
5825 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5827 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5839 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5841 \begin_inset Index idx
5844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5845 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5853 \begin_layout Standard
5854 The unnumbered section headings have a
5855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5862 at the end of their name.
5863 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5864 the table of contents, see section
5865 \begin_inset space ~
5869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5878 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5879 Changing the Numbering
5880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5882 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5889 \begin_layout Standard
5890 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5891 in the Table of Contents.
5892 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5894 Just as certain classes start with
5908 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5918 This is something you can change.
5921 \begin_layout Standard
5924 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5928 \begin_inset Index idx
5931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5940 \begin_inset space ~
5944 \begin_inset space ~
5949 you will see two counters.
5954 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5955 numbers a section heading.
5956 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5960 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5961 Short Titles of Headings
5962 \begin_inset Index idx
5965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5966 Section headings ! Short titles
5972 \begin_inset Argument 1
5975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5984 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5991 \begin_layout Standard
5992 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5993 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5994 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5995 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5998 \begin_layout Standard
6000 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6001 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6002 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6003 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6006 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6008 \begin_inset space ~
6014 This will insert a box labeled
6015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6019 \begin_inset space ~
6023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6026 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6027 This also works for captions inside floats.
6028 There can only be one short title per title.
6031 \begin_layout Standard
6032 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6035 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6039 \begin_layout Standard
6040 The following information applies to all section headings:
6043 \begin_layout Itemize
6044 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6047 \begin_layout Itemize
6048 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6051 \begin_layout Itemize
6052 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6055 \begin_layout Itemize
6056 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6059 \begin_layout Subsection
6063 \begin_layout Standard
6065 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6079 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6080 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6081 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
6082 the text they contain.
6083 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
6091 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6094 \begin_layout Standard
6095 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
6104 when you start a new paragraph.
6105 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6109 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6110 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
6111 have to change back to the
6115 environment yourself.
6118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6120 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6127 \begin_inset Index idx
6130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6139 \begin_layout Standard
6140 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
6141 time for the differences.
6150 are identical except for one difference:
6154 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
6163 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
6166 \begin_layout Standard
6167 Here's an example of the
6180 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
6182 See – no indentation!
6186 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
6187 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
6188 the other paragraph.
6191 \begin_layout Standard
6192 Here's another example, this time in the
6199 \begin_layout Quotation
6205 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
6206 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
6207 the first line, then
6211 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
6215 you were quoting other text.
6218 \begin_layout Quotation
6219 Here's a new paragraph.
6220 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6221 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6224 \begin_layout Standard
6225 As the examples show,
6229 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6230 They should put quotes in the
6235 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6239 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6244 \begin_inset Index idx
6247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6254 \begin_inset Index idx
6257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6273 \begin_layout Standard
6278 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6284 \begin_inset Newline newline
6287 Which I did not rehearse!
6291 It could be much worse.
6292 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6294 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6295 indented a bit more than the first.
6296 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6302 \begin_inset Newline newline
6305 And make things look fine
6306 \begin_inset Newline newline
6312 arg "newline-insert newline"
6318 \begin_layout Standard
6323 does not indent both margins.
6324 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6325 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6328 arg "newline-insert newline"
6334 \begin_layout Subsection
6336 \begin_inset Index idx
6339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6355 \begin_layout Standard
6357 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6367 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6368 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6377 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6378 lets you provide your own label.
6379 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6380 describing some general features of all four of them.
6383 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6387 \begin_layout Standard
6388 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6390 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6391 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6400 reset the environment to
6404 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6405 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6406 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6410 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6414 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6421 \begin_layout Standard
6422 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6423 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6424 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6426 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6427 you read all of section
6428 \begin_inset space ~
6432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6434 reference "sec:Nesting"
6441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6443 \begin_inset Index idx
6446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6462 \begin_layout Standard
6463 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6467 paragraph environment.
6468 It has the following properties:
6471 \begin_layout Itemize
6472 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6476 \begin_layout Itemize
6478 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6481 \begin_layout Itemize
6482 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6486 \begin_layout Itemize
6487 The items can have any length.
6489 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6490 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6497 \begin_layout Itemize
6502 environment inside another
6506 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6510 \begin_layout Itemize
6511 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6514 \begin_layout Itemize
6516 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6519 \begin_layout Itemize
6521 \begin_inset space ~
6525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6527 reference "sec:Nesting"
6531 for a full explanation of nesting.
6535 \begin_layout Standard
6536 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6545 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6548 \begin_layout Standard
6549 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6550 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6553 \begin_layout Itemize
6554 The label for the first level
6558 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6562 \begin_layout Itemize
6563 The label for the second level is a dash.
6567 \begin_layout Itemize
6568 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6572 \begin_layout Itemize
6573 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6577 \begin_layout Itemize
6578 Back out to the third level.
6582 \begin_layout Itemize
6583 Back to the second level.
6587 \begin_layout Itemize
6588 Back to the outermost level.
6591 \begin_layout Standard
6592 These are the default labels for an
6597 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6599 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6602 dialog in the submenu
6607 \begin_inset Index idx
6610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6616 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6620 \begin_layout Standard
6621 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6622 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6624 \begin_inset space ~
6628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6630 reference "sec:Nesting"
6637 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6639 \begin_inset Index idx
6642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6649 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6651 name "sec:Enumerate"
6658 \begin_layout Standard
6663 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6664 It has these properties:
6667 \begin_layout Enumerate
6668 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6672 \begin_layout Enumerate
6673 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6677 \begin_layout Enumerate
6679 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6682 \begin_layout Enumerate
6687 environment resets the counter to one.
6690 \begin_layout Enumerate
6703 \begin_layout Enumerate
6704 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6705 Items can have any length.
6708 \begin_layout Enumerate
6709 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6712 \begin_layout Enumerate
6713 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6716 \begin_layout Enumerate
6717 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6730 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6732 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6733 labels the four different levels in an
6740 \begin_layout Enumerate
6741 The first level of an
6745 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6749 \begin_layout Enumerate
6750 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6754 \begin_layout Enumerate
6755 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6759 \begin_layout Enumerate
6760 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6763 \begin_layout Enumerate
6764 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6769 \begin_layout Enumerate
6770 Back to the third level
6774 \begin_layout Enumerate
6775 Back to the second level.
6779 \begin_layout Enumerate
6780 Back to the outermost level.
6783 \begin_layout Standard
6784 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6788 environment, see section
6789 \begin_inset space ~
6793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6795 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6800 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6804 \begin_layout Standard
6805 There is more to nesting
6809 environments than we've stated here.
6810 You should read section
6811 \begin_inset space ~
6815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6817 reference "sec:Nesting"
6821 to learn more about nesting.
6824 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6826 \begin_inset Index idx
6829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6838 \begin_layout Standard
6839 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6843 list has no fixed label.
6844 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6853 of the first line as the label.
6857 \begin_layout Description
6858 Example: This is an example of the
6865 \begin_layout Standard
6867 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6871 \begin_layout Standard
6873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6880 it is meant that the first usage of the
6884 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6886 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6894 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6899 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6900 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6902 \begin_inset space ~
6908 \begin_inset space ~
6912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6914 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6918 for more information.) Here is an example:
6921 \begin_layout Description
6923 \begin_inset space ~
6926 Example: This one shows how to use a
6929 \begin_inset space ~
6941 \begin_layout Description
6942 Usage: You should use the
6946 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6947 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6949 It's not a good idea to use a
6953 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6954 You're better off using
6966 paragraphs into them.
6969 \begin_layout Description
6970 Nesting: You can nest
6974 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6978 \begin_layout Standard
6979 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6980 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6981 them from the first line.
6984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6986 \begin_inset Index idx
6989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6998 \begin_layout Standard
7003 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7004 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7008 \begin_layout Standard
7017 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
7019 Here are its properties:
7022 \begin_layout Labeling
7023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7025 \begin_inset space ~
7028 labels \SpecialChar LyX
7030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7037 of each line as the item label.
7042 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
7043 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
7044 space as described above.
7047 \begin_layout Labeling
7048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7049 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
7050 uses different margins for the item label and the
7051 body of the item text.
7052 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
7053 label width plus a little extra space.
7056 \begin_layout Labeling
7057 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7059 \begin_inset space ~
7062 width \SpecialChar LyX
7063 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
7064 If the label width is larger, the label
7065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7072 into the first line.
7073 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
7074 margin of the rest of the item text.
7077 \begin_layout Labeling
7078 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7080 \begin_inset space ~
7083 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
7088 environment has the same left margin.
7089 \begin_inset Newline newline
7092 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
7095 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7097 \begin_inset space ~
7102 dialog (toolbar button
7105 arg "layout-paragraph"
7112 \begin_inset space ~
7117 determines the default label width.
7118 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
7120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7127 multiple times instead.
7128 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
7131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7138 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
7141 \begin_inset space ~
7146 every time you alter a label in a
7151 \begin_inset Newline newline
7154 The predefined default width is the length of
7155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7163 \begin_inset space ~
7169 \begin_layout Standard
7174 list the same way as the
7178 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
7184 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
7188 \begin_layout Standard
7193 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
7194 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7196 \begin_inset space ~
7200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7202 reference "sec:Nesting"
7206 to learn about nesting.
7209 \begin_layout Standard
7210 There is yet another feature of the
7214 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
7215 left-justifies the item labels by
7217 You can use additional
7221 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7222 justifies the item label.
7227 are documented in section
7228 \begin_inset space ~
7232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7234 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7239 Here are some examples:
7242 \begin_layout Labeling
7243 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7244 Left The default for
7251 \begin_layout Labeling
7252 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7253 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7260 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7263 \begin_layout Labeling
7264 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7265 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7269 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7276 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7279 \begin_layout Subsection
7281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7283 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7288 \begin_inset Index idx
7291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7300 \begin_layout Standard
7301 The features described in this section require that the module
7303 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7305 is loaded in the document settings.
7306 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7312 \begin_inset Index idx
7315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7326 Custom Enumerate Lists
7327 \begin_inset Index idx
7330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7341 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7347 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7348 There you add the command
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7359 \begin_layout Standard
7371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7372 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7373 Code, look at section
7374 \begin_inset space ~
7378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7380 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7393 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7400 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7401 For capital Roman numerals replace
7413 in the command above.
7414 For Arabic numerals use
7422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7429 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7444 \begin_layout Standard
7446 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7454 You can only number 26
7455 \begin_inset space ~
7458 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7466 \begin_layout Standard
7467 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7468 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7471 \begin_layout Standard
7472 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7475 \begin_layout Enumerate
7476 \begin_inset Argument 1
7479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7505 \begin_layout Enumerate
7506 \begin_inset Argument 1
7509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7532 \begin_layout Enumerate
7537 \begin_layout Enumerate
7538 \begin_inset Argument 1
7541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7565 \begin_layout Enumerate
7566 \begin_inset Argument 1
7569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7595 \begin_layout Standard
7596 For this list these commands were used:
7599 \begin_layout Standard
7610 \begin_inset Newline newline
7618 \begin_inset Newline newline
7626 \begin_inset Newline newline
7636 \begin_layout Standard
7643 makes the label emphasized and
7652 \begin_layout Standard
7653 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7661 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7662 lists until you change the definition.
7670 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7672 \begin_inset Index idx
7675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7676 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7684 \begin_layout Standard
7685 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7688 \begin_layout Enumerate
7689 \begin_inset Argument 1
7692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7711 \begin_inset Note Note
7714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7715 goes back to default numbering
7723 \begin_layout Enumerate
7727 \begin_layout Standard
7731 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7735 \begin_layout Standard
7736 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7742 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
7743 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7744 to indicate that it is a resumed list
7745 and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7746 , but in the output.
7751 \begin_layout Standard
7752 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7760 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7769 \begin_layout Standard
7770 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7772 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7773 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7774 of a normal enumeration.
7775 There, insert the command
7778 \begin_layout Standard
7784 \begin_layout Standard
7789 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7793 \begin_layout Enumerate
7797 \begin_layout Enumerate
7801 \begin_layout Standard
7802 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7805 \begin_layout Enumerate
7806 \begin_inset Argument 1
7809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7825 This enumeration starts at 4
7828 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7830 \begin_inset Index idx
7833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7842 \begin_layout Standard
7843 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7845 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7848 \begin_layout Itemize
7852 \begin_layout Itemize
7853 with standard spacing
7856 \begin_layout Standard
7857 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7859 Add there the command
7863 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7866 \begin_layout Itemize
7867 \begin_inset Argument 1
7870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7889 \begin_layout Itemize
7893 \begin_layout Itemize
7897 \begin_layout Standard
7898 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7905 \begin_inset Index idx
7908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7916 For more information see its documentation,
7917 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7927 \begin_layout Standard
7928 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7930 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7931 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7932 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7935 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7938 \begin_layout Enumerate
7939 \begin_inset Argument 1
7942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7950 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7963 \begin_layout Enumerate
7964 with negative indentation
7967 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7968 Further Customization
7969 \begin_inset Index idx
7972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7973 Lists ! Customization
7981 \begin_layout Standard
7982 You can also change the style of description lists.
7986 \begin_layout Standard
7992 \begin_layout Standard
7993 changes the description label font, the command
7996 \begin_layout Standard
8002 \begin_layout Standard
8003 sets the list style.
8006 \begin_layout Standard
8007 An example where the command
8010 \begin_layout Standard
8015 itshape, style=nextline
8018 \begin_layout Standard
8022 \begin_layout Description
8024 \begin_inset space ~
8028 \begin_inset Argument 1
8031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8037 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
8039 itshape, style=nextline
8049 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
8050 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
8054 \begin_layout Description
8056 \begin_inset space ~
8059 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
8060 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
8061 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
8064 \begin_layout Standard
8065 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8071 \begin_inset Index idx
8074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8082 For more information see its documentation
8083 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8093 \begin_layout Subsection
8095 \begin_inset Index idx
8098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8107 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8109 \begin_inset space ~
8112 Address: An Overview
8115 \begin_layout Standard
8116 Although \SpecialChar LyX
8117 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
8125 \begin_inset space ~
8131 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
8132 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
8133 gags on the document.
8134 In contrast, you can use the
8141 \begin_inset space ~
8146 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
8147 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
8151 \begin_layout Standard
8152 Of course, you're not limited to using
8159 \begin_inset space ~
8168 \begin_inset space ~
8173 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
8174 some European academic papers.
8177 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8179 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8181 name "sec:Address-Usage"
8188 \begin_layout Standard
8193 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
8194 for the opening and signature in some countries.
8198 \begin_inset space ~
8203 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
8204 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8205 Here's an example of each:
8208 \begin_layout Right Address
8210 \begin_inset Newline newline
8214 \begin_inset Newline newline
8218 \begin_inset Newline newline
8221 When is it? What is today?
8224 \begin_layout Standard
8228 \begin_inset space ~
8234 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8236 the largest block of text on a single line.
8237 Here's an example of the
8244 \begin_layout Address
8246 \begin_inset Newline newline
8249 Where do I send this
8250 \begin_inset Newline newline
8253 Your post office and country
8256 \begin_layout Standard
8257 As you can see, both
8264 \begin_inset space ~
8269 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8274 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8275 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8281 This makes sense, since
8289 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8290 Thus, you have to use
8297 arg "newline-insert newline"
8302 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8303 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8305 \begin_inset space ~
8309 \begin_inset space ~
8314 ) to start a new line in an
8321 \begin_inset space ~
8329 \begin_layout Subsection
8333 \begin_layout Standard
8334 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8335 or list of references.
8337 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8340 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8342 \begin_inset Index idx
8345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8354 \begin_layout Standard
8359 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8360 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8361 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8362 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8366 in anything else or vice versa.
8372 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8373 The book document classes ignores the
8377 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8381 in a letter document class.
8384 \begin_layout Standard
8389 environment does several things for you.
8390 First, it puts the centered label
8391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8399 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8401 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8402 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8403 the subsequent text.
8404 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8406 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8410 \begin_layout Standard
8411 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8415 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8416 The new paragraph will still be in the
8421 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8422 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8425 \begin_layout Standard
8426 \begin_inset Float figure
8433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8435 \begin_inset Graphics
8436 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8444 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8449 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8470 \begin_layout Standard
8471 We would love to demonstrate the
8475 environment, but since this document is in the
8476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8483 class, we can't do this.
8484 We inserted it therefore as figure
8485 \begin_inset space ~
8489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8491 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8496 If you have never heard of an
8497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8504 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8507 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8509 \begin_inset Index idx
8512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8519 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8521 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8528 \begin_layout Standard
8533 environment is used to list references.
8534 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8535 only use it at the end of the document.
8547 \begin_layout Standard
8548 When you first open a
8552 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8553 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8569 depending on the document class.
8570 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8571 Each paragraph of the
8575 environment is a bibliography entry.
8580 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8581 Each new paragraph is still in the
8588 \begin_layout Standard
8589 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8590 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8592 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8594 handling, have a look at section
8595 \begin_inset space ~
8599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8601 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8608 \begin_layout Subsection
8609 Special Environments
8612 \begin_layout Standard
8614 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8615 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8618 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8623 \begin_inset Index idx
8626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8636 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8643 \begin_layout Standard
8649 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8651 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8656 key as a fixed whitespace.
8660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8673 \begin_inset space ~
8678 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8696 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8699 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8702 arg "newline-insert newline"
8719 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8720 So, when you finish using the
8725 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8726 Also, you can nest the
8731 environment inside of others.
8734 \begin_layout Standard
8735 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8738 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 arg "newline-insert newline"
8745 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8750 \begin_inset space \space{}
8760 arg "newline-insert newline"
8766 \begin_layout Itemize
8770 arg "newline-insert newline"
8780 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8786 \begin_layout Itemize
8787 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8788 You must put at least one
8792 in any line you want blank.
8793 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8797 \begin_layout Itemize
8798 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8802 since that will insert
8807 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8810 arg "self-insert \""
8816 \begin_layout Standard
8820 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8824 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8828 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8832 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8836 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8837 printf("Hello World!
8842 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8846 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8850 \begin_layout Standard
8851 This is just the standard
8852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8862 \begin_layout Standard
8868 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8870 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8871 as if you used a typewriter.
8872 \begin_inset Index idx
8875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8876 Paragraph environments|)
8881 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8884 Program Code Listings
8889 \begin_inset space ~
8897 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8901 \begin_inset Index idx
8904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8913 \begin_layout Standard
8918 environment is similar to the
8923 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8924 computer console text.
8929 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8943 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8944 you can have empty lines.
8957 \begin_layout Itemize
8958 have a certain language and a text style
8961 \begin_layout Itemize
8962 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8963 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8964 and \SpecialChar TeX
8968 \begin_layout Standard
8969 Because of these properties
8973 works like a typewriter.
8977 \begin_layout Verbatim
8981 \begin_layout Verbatim
8984 The following 2 lines are empty:
8987 \begin_layout Verbatim
8991 \begin_layout Verbatim
8995 \begin_layout Verbatim
8996 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
9001 \begin_layout Standard
9006 environment is identical to
9010 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
9011 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
9018 \begin_layout Verbatim*
9022 \begin_layout Section
9023 Nesting Environments
9024 \begin_inset Index idx
9027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9028 Nesting ! Environments
9034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9043 \begin_layout Subsection
9047 \begin_layout Standard
9049 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
9051 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
9053 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
9055 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
9057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9067 \begin_layout Enumerate
9071 \begin_layout Enumerate
9076 \begin_layout Enumerate
9080 \begin_layout Enumerate
9085 \begin_layout Enumerate
9089 \begin_layout Standard
9090 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9091 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
9093 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9095 \begin_inset space ~
9099 \begin_inset space ~
9107 \begin_inset space ~
9111 \begin_inset space ~
9116 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
9118 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
9121 arg "depth-increment"
9127 arg "depth-decrement"
9141 arg "depth-increment"
9147 arg "depth-decrement"
9151 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
9152 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
9156 \begin_layout Standard
9157 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9158 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9159 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9160 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
9161 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9164 \begin_layout Standard
9165 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9167 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
9169 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9172 \begin_layout Subsection
9173 What You Can and Can't Nest
9176 \begin_layout Standard
9177 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
9178 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9181 \begin_layout Standard
9182 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
9183 than a simple yes or no.
9184 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9187 \begin_layout Itemize
9188 Completely unnestable
9191 \begin_layout Itemize
9192 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
9196 \begin_layout Itemize
9197 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
9201 \begin_layout Standard
9202 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
9203 environments have them:
9206 \begin_layout Description
9207 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9208 Can't nest into them.
9212 \begin_layout Itemize
9218 \begin_layout Itemize
9224 \begin_layout Itemize
9230 \begin_layout Itemize
9236 \begin_layout Itemize
9243 \begin_layout Description
9245 \begin_inset space ~
9248 Nestable You can nest them.
9249 You can nest other things into them.
9253 \begin_layout Itemize
9259 \begin_layout Itemize
9265 \begin_layout Itemize
9271 \begin_layout Itemize
9277 \begin_layout Itemize
9283 \begin_layout Itemize
9289 \begin_layout Itemize
9295 \begin_layout Itemize
9302 \begin_layout Itemize
9308 \begin_layout Itemize
9315 \begin_layout Description
9316 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9317 You can't nest anything into them.
9321 \begin_layout Itemize
9327 \begin_layout Itemize
9333 \begin_layout Itemize
9339 \begin_layout Itemize
9345 \begin_layout Itemize
9351 \begin_layout Itemize
9357 \begin_layout Itemize
9363 \begin_layout Itemize
9369 \begin_layout Itemize
9375 \begin_layout Itemize
9381 \begin_layout Itemize
9387 \begin_layout Itemize
9393 \begin_layout Itemize
9399 \begin_layout Itemize
9403 \begin_inset space ~
9409 \begin_layout Itemize
9416 \begin_layout Standard
9417 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9425 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9435 \begin_inset space ~
9438 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9439 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9440 nested section headings violate this.
9448 \begin_layout Subsection
9449 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9450 \begin_inset Index idx
9453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9454 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9462 \begin_layout Standard
9463 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9464 affected by nesting anyhow.
9468 \begin_layout Itemize
9472 \begin_layout Itemize
9476 \begin_layout Itemize
9480 \begin_layout Standard
9482 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9490 Figures and tables in
9494 are not affected by this.
9499 Have a look at section
9500 \begin_inset space ~
9504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9506 reference "sec:Floats"
9510 for more information about
9517 \begin_layout Standard
9519 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9520 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9524 \begin_layout Standard
9525 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9533 of its own, it behaves just like a
9534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9541 paragraph environment.
9542 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9546 \begin_layout Standard
9547 Here's an example with a table:
9550 \begin_layout Enumerate
9555 \begin_layout Enumerate
9556 This is (a) and it's nested.
9560 \begin_layout Standard
9561 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9567 \begin_layout Standard
9569 \begin_inset Tabular
9570 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9571 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9572 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9573 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9657 \begin_layout Standard
9658 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9665 \begin_layout Enumerate
9667 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9671 \begin_layout Enumerate
9675 \begin_layout Standard
9676 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9679 \begin_layout Enumerate
9684 \begin_layout Enumerate
9685 This is (a) and it's nested.
9689 \begin_layout Standard
9690 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9696 \begin_layout Standard
9698 \begin_inset Tabular
9699 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9700 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9701 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9702 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9786 \begin_layout Standard
9787 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9793 \begin_layout Enumerate
9800 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9803 \begin_layout Enumerate
9807 \begin_layout Standard
9808 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9812 \begin_layout Standard
9813 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9816 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9819 \begin_layout Enumerate
9824 \begin_layout Enumerate
9825 This is (a) and it's nested.
9828 \begin_layout Standard
9829 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9835 \begin_layout Standard
9837 \begin_inset Tabular
9838 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9839 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9840 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9841 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9926 \begin_layout Standard
9927 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9933 \begin_layout Enumerate
9935 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9942 \begin_layout Enumerate
9946 \begin_layout Standard
9947 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9953 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9954 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9958 \begin_layout Subsection
9959 Usage and General Features
9962 \begin_layout Standard
9963 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9964 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9973 is the innermost possible depth.
9974 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9977 \begin_layout Enumerate
9978 level #1 – outermost
9982 \begin_layout Enumerate
9987 \begin_layout Enumerate
9992 \begin_layout Enumerate
9997 \begin_layout Itemize
10002 \begin_layout Itemize
10011 \begin_layout Standard
10012 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
10013 both of them in the example.
10014 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
10024 For example, if we tried to nest another
10029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10036 , we would get errors.
10039 \begin_layout Subsection
10041 \begin_inset Index idx
10044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10053 \begin_layout Standard
10054 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
10055 We have several examples of nested environments.
10056 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
10060 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10061 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
10064 \begin_layout Labeling
10065 \labelwidthstring MMM
10066 #1-a This is the outermost level.
10075 \begin_layout Labeling
10076 \labelwidthstring MMM
10077 #2-a This is level #2.
10078 We created it by using
10081 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10087 arg "depth-increment"
10094 \begin_layout Labeling
10095 \labelwidthstring MMM
10096 #3-a This is level #3.
10097 This time, we just enter
10104 arg "depth-increment"
10108 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10112 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10118 arg "depth-increment"
10125 \begin_layout Standard
10130 environment, nested inside of
10131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10139 So, it's at level #4.
10140 We did this by entering
10143 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10149 arg "depth-increment"
10152 , then changing the paragraph environment to
10157 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
10173 \begin_layout Standard
10178 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
10181 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10187 \begin_layout Labeling
10188 \labelwidthstring MMM
10189 #4-a This is level #4.
10193 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10196 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10201 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
10205 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
10210 keep nesting things inside
10211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10222 \begin_layout Labeling
10223 \labelwidthstring MMM
10224 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10229 \begin_layout Labeling
10230 \labelwidthstring MMM
10231 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10232 and this is level #6.
10233 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10237 \begin_layout Labeling
10238 \labelwidthstring MMM
10239 #5-b Back to level #5.
10243 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10249 arg "depth-decrement"
10256 \begin_layout Labeling
10257 \labelwidthstring MMM
10261 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10267 arg "depth-decrement"
10270 , we're back at level #4.
10274 \begin_layout Labeling
10275 \labelwidthstring MMM
10276 #3-b Back to level #3.
10277 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10281 \begin_layout Labeling
10282 \labelwidthstring MMM
10283 #2-b Back to level #2.
10287 \begin_layout Labeling
10288 \labelwidthstring MMM
10289 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10290 After this sentence, we will enter
10294 and change the paragraph environment back to
10301 \begin_layout Standard
10302 We could have also used the
10318 environment in place of the
10323 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10326 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10327 Example 2: Inheritance
10330 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10331 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10334 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10343 arg "depth-increment"
10347 \begin_inset Newline newline
10350 which, we will change to the
10358 \begin_layout Enumerate
10363 environment, at level #2.
10366 \begin_layout Enumerate
10367 Notice how the nested
10371 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10375 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10379 \begin_layout Standard
10380 We ended this example by entering
10385 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10389 and reset the nesting depth by using
10392 arg "depth-decrement"
10398 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10399 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10408 \begin_inset Argument 1
10411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10412 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10420 \begin_layout Enumerate
10421 This is level #1, in an
10425 paragraph environment.
10426 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10430 \begin_layout Enumerate
10435 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10441 arg "depth-increment"
10445 Now, what happens if we nest an
10449 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10450 label be? An asterisk?
10454 \begin_layout Itemize
10464 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10465 So, its label is a bullet.
10466 (We got here by using
10469 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10475 arg "depth-increment"
10478 , then changing the environment to
10486 \begin_layout Itemize
10487 Here's level #4, produced using
10490 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10496 arg "depth-increment"
10500 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10505 \begin_layout Enumerate
10507 to get to level #5.
10508 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10513 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10517 , because we are in the
10525 environment (that is, it is an
10540 \begin_layout Enumerate
10545 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10546 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10550 \begin_layout Enumerate
10551 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10554 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10557 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10560 \begin_layout Enumerate
10564 arg "depth-decrement"
10567 to decrease the depth after the next
10570 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10577 \begin_layout Enumerate
10579 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10584 \begin_layout Enumerate
10586 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10587 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10591 \begin_layout Enumerate
10592 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10601 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10606 reset the counter for the label.
10610 \begin_layout Enumerate
10614 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10620 arg "depth-decrement"
10623 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10624 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10625 into the twofold-nested
10633 \begin_layout Enumerate
10634 The same thing happens if we do another
10637 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10643 arg "depth-decrement"
10646 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10649 \begin_layout Standard
10650 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10655 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10666 The number of other
10670 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10677 The same rule applies for the
10681 environment, as well.
10684 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10685 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10688 \begin_layout Enumerate
10689 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10690 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10691 the same detail with how we did it.
10700 \begin_layout Standard
10708 arg "depth-increment"
10715 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10716 the example in parentheses someplace.
10717 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10718 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10719 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10723 \begin_layout Enumerate
10728 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10732 \begin_layout Verse
10733 Now we will add verse.
10734 \begin_inset Newline newline
10737 It will get much worse.
10738 \begin_inset Newline newline
10748 arg "depth-increment"
10758 \begin_layout Verse
10759 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10760 \begin_inset Newline newline
10763 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10764 \begin_inset Newline newline
10770 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10778 \begin_layout Verse
10779 Here comes a table:
10783 \begin_layout Standard
10784 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10790 \begin_layout Standard
10792 \begin_inset Tabular
10793 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10794 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10795 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10796 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10881 \begin_layout Verse
10885 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10895 arg "depth-increment"
10901 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10907 \begin_inset Newline newline
10915 arg "depth-decrement"
10922 \begin_layout Enumerate
10927 : level #1) This is another item.
10928 Note that selecting a
10932 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10933 3 times to put the table inside the
10940 \begin_layout Quotation
10941 We're now ending the
10945 list and changing to
10950 We're still at level #1.
10951 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10952 The next set of paragraphs is a
10953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10960 We will nest both the
10967 \begin_inset space ~
10972 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10976 for the letter body.
10980 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10983 to preserve the depth.
10984 Remember that you need to use
10987 arg "newline-insert newline"
10990 to create multiple lines inside the
10997 \begin_inset space ~
11007 \begin_layout Right Address
11009 \begin_inset Newline newline
11012 Moosegroin, MT 00100
11013 \begin_inset Newline newline
11019 \begin_layout Address
11021 \begin_inset space ~
11027 \begin_layout Quotation
11028 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11032 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11033 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
11034 a backlog in our orders for methane.
11035 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
11036 as soon as possible.
11037 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
11040 \begin_layout Quotation
11041 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
11042 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
11043 with your order, along with payment.
11046 \begin_layout Quotation
11047 We thank you again for your patience.
11050 \begin_layout Address
11052 \begin_inset Newline newline
11059 \begin_layout Quotation
11060 That ends that example!
11063 \begin_layout Standard
11064 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11065 gives you a lot of power with just
11067 We could have easily nested an
11088 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11091 \begin_layout Subsection
11093 \begin_inset Index idx
11096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11097 Nesting ! Separation
11103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11105 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11112 \begin_layout Standard
11113 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
11115 For example you need two different enumerations:
11118 \begin_layout Enumerate
11123 \begin_layout Enumerate
11128 \begin_layout Enumerate
11132 \begin_layout Standard
11133 \begin_inset Separator plain
11139 \begin_layout Itemize
11145 \begin_layout Standard
11146 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11152 \begin_layout Enumerate
11156 \begin_layout Enumerate
11160 \begin_layout Enumerate
11164 \begin_layout Standard
11165 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
11166 list item and use the menu
11168 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11169 Separated <Name> Above
11173 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11174 Separated <Name> Below
11177 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
11178 ) and before or behind it the
11180 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
11183 \begin_layout Standard
11184 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
11185 (red arrow in LyX).
11186 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
11187 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
11190 \begin_layout Standard
11191 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
11194 arg "paragraph-break"
11201 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
11204 \begin_layout Section
11205 Spacing, Pagination and Line Breaks
11206 \begin_inset Index idx
11209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11218 \begin_layout Standard
11219 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
11220 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11222 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11223 be broken at the end of a line.
11224 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11228 \begin_layout Subsection
11230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11232 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11237 \begin_inset Index idx
11240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11249 \begin_layout Standard
11250 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11251 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11252 ) not to break the line at
11254 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11257 \begin_layout Quote
11258 Further documentation is given in section
11259 \begin_inset Newline newline
11263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11265 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11272 \begin_layout Standard
11273 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11288 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11297 A protected space is set with
11299 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11300 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11302 \begin_inset space ~
11310 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11316 \begin_layout Subsection
11318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11320 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11325 \begin_inset Index idx
11328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11329 Spacing ! Horizontal
11337 \begin_layout Standard
11338 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11340 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11341 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11345 The length units are listed in Appendix
11346 \begin_inset space ~
11350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11352 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11359 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11363 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11368 \begin_inset Index idx
11371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11372 Spaces ! Inter-word
11380 \begin_layout Standard
11381 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11382 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11383 at the ends of sentences.
11384 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11385 automatically takes care about this.
11386 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11387 followed by a period; see section
11388 \begin_inset space ~
11392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11394 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11399 To insert a normal space, select
11401 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11402 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11404 \begin_inset space ~
11412 arg "space-insert normal"
11418 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11422 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11427 \begin_inset Index idx
11430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11439 \begin_layout Standard
11441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11448 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11457 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11458 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11459 inside abbreviations:
11462 \begin_layout Quote
11464 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11468 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11471 \begin_layout Standard
11472 or between values and units.
11473 Compare for example this:
11474 \begin_inset Newline newline
11478 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11482 \begin_inset Newline newline
11485 10 kg (normal space
11488 \begin_layout Standard
11489 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11491 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11492 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11494 \begin_inset space ~
11502 arg "space-insert thin"
11508 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11512 \begin_layout Standard
11513 You can also insert the following space types:
11516 \begin_layout Description
11518 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11520 \begin_inset space ~
11526 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11530 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11534 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11538 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11540 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11543 space between the arrows.
11544 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11548 \begin_layout Description
11550 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11552 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11556 \begin_inset space ~
11559 space A line with a
11560 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11564 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11568 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11572 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11574 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11577 space between the arrows.
11580 \begin_layout Description
11582 \begin_inset space ~
11586 \begin_inset space ~
11589 space A line with a
11590 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11594 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11598 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11601 negative thin space between the arrows.
11604 \begin_layout Description
11606 \begin_inset space ~
11610 \begin_inset space ~
11613 space A line with a
11614 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11618 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11622 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11625 negative medium space between the arrows.
11628 \begin_layout Description
11630 \begin_inset space ~
11634 \begin_inset space ~
11637 space A line with a
11638 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11642 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11646 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11649 negative thick space between the arrows.
11652 \begin_layout Description
11654 \begin_inset space ~
11658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11662 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11666 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11670 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11674 \begin_inset space ~
11678 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11681 em) space between the arrows.
11684 \begin_layout Description
11686 \begin_inset space ~
11690 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11694 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11698 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11702 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11706 \begin_inset space ~
11710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11713 em) space between the arrows.
11716 \begin_layout Description
11718 \begin_inset space ~
11722 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11726 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11730 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11734 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11738 \begin_inset space ~
11742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11745 em) space between the arrows.
11748 \begin_layout Description
11750 \begin_inset space ~
11754 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11758 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11763 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11770 cm space between the arrows.
11773 \begin_layout Standard
11775 \begin_inset space ~
11779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11781 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11785 lists the different space sizes.
11788 \begin_layout Standard
11789 \begin_inset Float table
11796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11797 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11802 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11806 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11816 \begin_inset Tabular
11817 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11818 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11820 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11860 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11884 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11917 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11923 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11934 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11936 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11945 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11951 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11962 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11992 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11996 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12149 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12151 \begin_inset Index idx
12154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12163 \begin_layout Standard
12164 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
12165 feature for adding extra space
12166 in a uniform fashion.
12167 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
12168 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
12169 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
12170 equally between themselves.
12173 \begin_layout Standard
12174 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
12177 \begin_layout Quote
12179 This is on the left side
12180 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12183 This is on the right
12186 \begin_layout Quote
12189 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12193 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12199 \begin_layout Quote
12202 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12206 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12210 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12216 \begin_layout Standard
12217 That was an example in the
12223 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12227 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12231 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12234 is one in a standard paragraph.
12235 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12239 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12242 \begin_layout Standard
12243 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12246 \begin_inset space ~
12251 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12254 \begin_layout Standard
12256 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12260 \begin_inset space ~
12266 \begin_layout Standard
12268 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12272 \begin_inset space ~
12278 \begin_layout Standard
12280 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12284 \begin_inset space ~
12290 \begin_layout Standard
12292 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12296 \begin_inset space ~
12302 \begin_layout Standard
12304 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12306 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12310 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12311 (= opened downwards)
12314 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12318 \begin_inset space ~
12324 \begin_layout Standard
12326 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12328 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12332 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12336 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12340 \begin_inset space ~
12346 \begin_layout Standard
12347 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12355 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12359 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12361 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12362 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12366 option in the space dialog.
12374 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12376 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12378 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12383 \begin_inset Index idx
12386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12395 \begin_layout Standard
12396 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12397 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12400 \begin_layout Standard
12401 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12404 What is correct English?:
12405 \begin_inset Newline newline
12409 \begin_inset Newline newline
12413 \begin_inset space ~
12416 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12417 \begin_inset Newline newline
12421 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12432 \begin_inset Newline newline
12436 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12447 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12453 \begin_layout Standard
12455 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12460 \begin_inset space ~
12464 \begin_inset space ~
12468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12472 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12474 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12475 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12479 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12485 \begin_inset space ~
12489 \begin_inset space ~
12493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12496 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12505 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12506 That is why it is named
12507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12515 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12516 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12520 \begin_layout Subsection
12522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12524 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12529 \begin_inset Index idx
12532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12541 \begin_layout Standard
12542 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12544 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12545 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12547 \begin_inset space ~
12553 There you find the following sizes:
12556 \begin_layout Standard
12569 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12570 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12575 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12577 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12578 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12580 \begin_inset space ~
12586 \begin_inset Index idx
12589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12590 Document ! Settings
12595 for the paragraph separation.
12596 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12605 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12609 \begin_layout Standard
12611 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12620 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12621 size including line spacing.
12626 \begin_layout Standard
12632 \begin_inset Index idx
12635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12641 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12642 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12647 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12648 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12657 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12666 s are described in section
12667 \begin_inset space ~
12671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12673 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12682 If there are several
12686 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12687 You can therefore use
12691 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12694 \begin_layout Standard
12699 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12700 \begin_inset space ~
12704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12706 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12713 \begin_layout Standard
12714 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12724 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12725 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12737 \begin_layout Subsection
12738 Paragraph Alignment
12739 \begin_inset Index idx
12742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12743 Paragraph ! Alignment
12751 \begin_layout Standard
12752 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12754 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12757 dialog (toolbar button
12760 arg "layout-paragraph"
12764 There are five possibilities:
12767 \begin_layout Itemize
12775 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12781 \begin_layout Itemize
12789 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12795 \begin_layout Itemize
12803 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12809 \begin_layout Itemize
12817 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12823 \begin_layout Itemize
12831 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12837 \begin_layout Standard
12838 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12839 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12840 the left and right margins.
12841 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12844 \begin_layout Standard
12846 This paragraph is right aligned,
12849 \begin_layout Standard
12851 this one is centered,
12854 \begin_layout Standard
12856 this one is left aligned.
12859 \begin_layout Subsection
12861 \begin_inset Index idx
12864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12865 Page breaks ! Forced
12871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12873 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12880 \begin_layout Standard
12881 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12882 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12883 force a page break where you want one.
12884 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12885 is good at page breaking.
12886 Only if you use a lot of
12890 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12891 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12894 \begin_layout Standard
12895 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12896 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12900 have to change the page breaking.
12903 \begin_layout Standard
12904 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12906 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12908 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12909 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12911 \begin_inset space ~
12917 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12919 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12920 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12922 \begin_inset space ~
12927 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12929 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12930 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12933 \begin_layout Standard
12934 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12935 at the top of a page.
12936 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12938 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12939 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12940 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12944 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12948 to learn more about
12955 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12959 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12964 \begin_inset Index idx
12967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12968 Page breaks ! Clear
12976 \begin_layout Standard
12977 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12978 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12979 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12980 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12981 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12984 \begin_layout Standard
12985 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12987 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12988 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12990 \begin_inset space ~
12996 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12998 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12999 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13001 \begin_inset space ~
13005 \begin_inset space ~
13010 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
13011 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
13012 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
13016 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13018 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
13019 Suppressing Page Breaks
13022 \begin_inset Index idx
13025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13027 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
13031 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706335
13040 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
13042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13044 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
13049 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
13053 \begin_layout Standard
13055 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13056 To discourage page break at
13057 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
13059 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13060 certain point you can use
13064 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13066 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
13069 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13071 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
13078 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
13079 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when
13080 you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case
13081 using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
13086 \begin_layout Subsection
13088 \begin_inset Index idx
13091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13100 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
13107 \begin_layout Standard
13108 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
13110 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
13112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13113 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13115 \begin_inset space ~
13119 \begin_inset space ~
13127 arg "newline-insert newline"
13131 Another type that is inserted via the menu
13133 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13134 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13136 \begin_inset space ~
13140 \begin_inset space ~
13148 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
13151 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
13153 This is useful to avoid
13154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13161 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
13164 \begin_layout Standard
13165 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
13166 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
13168 very good at line breaking.
13169 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
13170 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
13171 \begin_inset space ~
13175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13177 reference "sec:Quote"
13182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13184 reference "sec:Verse"
13189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13191 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
13198 \begin_layout Subsection
13200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13202 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
13207 \begin_inset Index idx
13210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13219 \begin_layout Standard
13221 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13232 \begin_layout Standard
13236 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13237 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13239 \begin_inset space ~
13244 you can insert horizontal lines.
13245 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
13246 of the current text line or the paragraph.
13247 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
13250 \begin_layout Standard
13252 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13263 \begin_layout Section
13264 Characters and Symbols
13267 \begin_layout Standard
13268 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
13269 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
13270 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
13272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13278 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
13282 for information on how this is done.
13285 \begin_layout Standard
13286 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
13291 dialog via the menu
13293 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13294 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13300 \begin_layout Standard
13301 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13309 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13310 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13312 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13320 \begin_layout Section
13321 Fonts and Text Styles
13322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13324 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13331 \begin_layout Subsection
13333 \begin_inset Index idx
13336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13345 \begin_layout Standard
13346 There are two types of fonts:
13349 \begin_layout Description
13351 \begin_inset space ~
13355 \begin_inset Index idx
13358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13364 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13369 characters) in the font.
13370 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13371 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13372 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13373 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13374 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13375 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13376 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13377 \begin_inset Newline newline
13380 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13381 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13382 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13383 sizes than at small ones.
13384 \begin_inset Newline newline
13398 \begin_inset space ~
13406 \begin_layout Description
13408 \begin_inset space ~
13412 \begin_inset Index idx
13415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13421 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13422 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13423 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13424 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13425 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13426 image manipulation program.
13427 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13428 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13429 \begin_inset space ~
13432 pixels high up to 34
13433 \begin_inset space ~
13436 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13437 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13438 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13440 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13441 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13442 \begin_inset Newline newline
13445 Bitmap fonts are named
13448 \begin_inset space ~
13453 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13456 \begin_layout Standard
13457 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13458 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13459 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13460 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13461 use scalable fonts.
13464 \begin_layout Standard
13465 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13468 \begin_layout Standard
13469 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13471 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13473 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13476 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13477 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13478 font, to emphasize text you use an
13479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13487 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13489 In \SpecialChar LyX
13490 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13494 \begin_layout Subsection
13497 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13499 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13506 \begin_layout Standard
13507 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13508 used its own fonts.
13509 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13510 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13513 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13514 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13515 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13516 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13517 to a word processor.
13518 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13519 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13520 files are very portable across
13521 different machines.
13522 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13523 has increased a lot
13524 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13527 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13529 \begin_inset space ~
13533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13535 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13540 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13541 code in the document
13542 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13545 \begin_layout Standard
13546 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13547 engines that are also able directly
13548 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13550 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13552 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13554 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13555 that is installed on your system.
13556 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13559 \begin_layout Standard
13560 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13568 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13569 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13577 \begin_layout Subsection
13578 Document Font and Font size
13579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13581 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13586 \begin_inset Index idx
13589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13596 \begin_inset Index idx
13599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13608 \begin_layout Standard
13609 You can set the document fonts in the
13611 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13615 \begin_inset Index idx
13618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13619 Document ! Settings
13629 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13630 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13633 \begin_inset space ~
13642 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13644 \begin_inset space ~
13647 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13650 \begin_layout Standard
13655 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13656 This requires that you use
13668 as the output format, i.
13669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13673 \begin_inset space \space{}
13676 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13677 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13678 installed (see section
13679 \begin_inset space ~
13683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13685 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13690 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13692 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13693 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13695 \begin_inset space ~
13698 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13699 cannot determine the family.
13700 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13701 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13704 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13707 \begin_layout Standard
13708 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13709 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13714 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13720 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13722 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13724 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13727 font encoding, this is
13728 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13729 , depending on the document language,
13732 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13733 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13741 \begin_inset space ~
13747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13757 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13758 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13766 \begin_inset space ~
13772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13780 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13801 European Computer Modern
13804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13812 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13815 \begin_layout Standard
13820 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13821 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13826 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13829 \begin_inset space ~
13834 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13840 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13841 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13844 \begin_layout Itemize
13848 \begin_inset space ~
13853 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13866 \begin_inset space ~
13871 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13872 community in order to replace
13876 as the default font.
13877 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13878 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13881 \begin_inset space ~
13894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13895 One difference is improved kerning.
13903 \begin_layout Itemize
13904 If you do not like the look of
13912 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13913 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13917 \begin_inset space ~
13923 \begin_inset space ~
13933 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13934 \begin_inset space ~
13937 serif and typewriter fonts,
13941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13942 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13949 \begin_inset space ~
13958 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13963 \begin_inset space \space{}
13971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13975 \begin_inset space \space{}
13981 \begin_inset space ~
13989 \begin_inset space ~
13999 but you can also select your own.
14000 \begin_inset Newline newline
14003 The differences between roman,
14006 \begin_inset space ~
14015 fonts are explained in section
14016 \begin_inset space ~
14020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14022 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14027 \begin_inset Newline newline
14033 \begin_inset space ~
14038 was originally designed for newspapers.
14039 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
14040 into the small newspaper columns.
14044 \begin_inset space ~
14049 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
14052 \begin_layout Standard
14053 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
14066 Some classes provide additional sizes.
14071 depends on the class you are using.
14072 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
14075 \begin_layout Standard
14076 Note that the font size is the
14081 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
14082 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
14083 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
14084 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
14087 \begin_inset space ~
14093 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
14094 \begin_inset space ~
14098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14100 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14107 \begin_layout Standard
14111 \begin_inset space ~
14116 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
14118 \begin_inset space ~
14121 serif or typewriter.
14126 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
14136 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
14139 \begin_layout Standard
14144 LaTeX font encoding
14146 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
14147 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14153 \begin_inset Index idx
14156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14164 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
14166 \begin_inset space ~
14170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14172 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
14179 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
14180 Unless you have specific reasons, use
14181 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
14185 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
14193 \begin_layout Standard
14194 With some fonts, the checkboxes
14196 Use Old Style Figures
14200 Use True Small Caps
14203 These are extra features some fonts provide.
14206 Use Old Style Figures
14208 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
14210 Old style figures are the numerals (0
14211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14218 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
14222 Use True Small Caps
14224 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
14225 of scaled capitals.
14226 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
14227 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
14228 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
14232 \begin_layout Standard
14234 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
14235 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
14236 provided by the font package (or the
14240 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
14245 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
14251 \begin_layout Standard
14256 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
14257 a font to display the script characters.
14261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14262 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14268 \begin_inset Index idx
14271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14278 So this has no effect for the document language
14294 \begin_layout Standard
14297 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14299 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14300 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14306 \begin_inset Index idx
14309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14311 packages ! microtype
14320 \begin_layout Standard
14323 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14325 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14330 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14331 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14337 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14338 \begin_inset space ~
14342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14344 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14354 \begin_layout Standard
14355 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14359 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14367 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14372 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14373 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14375 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14377 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14380 dialog, see section
14381 \begin_inset space ~
14385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14387 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14399 \begin_layout Subsection
14403 \begin_layout Standard
14404 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14405 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14407 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14408 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14409 choose a math font in the dialog
14411 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14415 \begin_inset Index idx
14418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14419 Document ! Settings
14425 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14426 automatically selects a math font.
14427 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14428 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14437 \begin_inset space ~
14443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14448 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14449 document font is available.
14452 \begin_layout Standard
14453 Note that the math font will not be used for
14457 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14463 or by the insertion of the command
14470 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14471 \begin_inset space ~
14475 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14476 while the math characters do not.
14478 \begin_inset space ~
14481 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14484 \begin_inset space ~
14492 \begin_inset space ~
14497 in the document font settings.
14500 \begin_layout Standard
14501 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14502 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14503 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14504 font (in most cases
14505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14511 \begin_inset space ~
14517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14520 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14521 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14529 \begin_inset space ~
14535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14541 \begin_layout Subsection
14543 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14545 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14549 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14553 name "subsec:charstyles"
14560 \begin_inset Index idx
14563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14570 \begin_inset Index idx
14573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14582 \begin_layout Standard
14583 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14584 automatically changes the
14585 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14588 style for certain paragraph environments.
14590 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14591 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14593 This is where we meet the concept of
14599 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14601 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14605 \begin_layout Standard
14607 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14612 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14614 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14627 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14636 e., available with all document classes.
14637 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14641 for specific purposes.
14642 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14645 \begin_layout Standard
14647 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14648 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14658 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14662 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14663 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14675 — you customized the
14680 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14681 among them, encourage the use of
14693 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14694 \begin_inset space ~
14698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14700 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14705 Rather than fiddling with
14709 , they encourage the use of
14713 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14714 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14718 \begin_inset Quotes els
14722 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14725 ), not their form (
14726 \begin_inset Quotes els
14730 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14734 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14735 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14736 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14737 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14738 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14739 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14745 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14749 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14750 With a semantic markup (such as
14754 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14759 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14761 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14762 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14765 \begin_layout Standard
14767 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14768 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14769 by \SpecialChar LyX
14775 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14777 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14778 Builtin Text Styles
14779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14781 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14788 \begin_layout Standard
14790 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14791 The two builtin text styles can be
14792 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14796 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14800 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14801 both of these styles
14804 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14808 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006132
14810 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006135
14812 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14818 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14824 \begin_layout Standard
14829 style, do one of the following:
14832 \begin_layout Itemize
14833 click on the toolbar button
14842 \begin_layout Itemize
14843 use the key binding
14850 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14854 \begin_layout Itemize
14856 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14860 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006154
14862 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006157
14864 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14872 arg "dialog-show character"
14876 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14880 arg "dialog-show character"
14884 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006237
14885 as described in section
14886 \begin_inset space ~
14890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14892 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14897 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006263
14907 \begin_layout Standard
14909 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006284
14911 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006284
14915 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006286
14919 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006290
14921 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006291
14925 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006296
14933 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14936 \begin_layout Standard
14937 One typically uses the
14941 style for proper names.
14943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14950 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14956 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14960 \begin_layout Standard
14962 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14967 is producing text in
14971 , but the definition can be changed.
14976 \begin_layout Standard
14978 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14980 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14988 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14995 \begin_layout Itemize
14996 clicking on the toolbar button
15005 \begin_layout Itemize
15006 using the keybindings
15013 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
15017 \begin_layout Itemize
15019 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15023 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006353
15025 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006356
15027 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15035 arg "dialog-show character"
15039 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15043 arg "dialog-show character"
15047 \change_deleted 630872221 1621007331
15048 as described in section
15049 \begin_inset space ~
15053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15055 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15060 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006374
15070 \begin_layout Standard
15075 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
15077 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
15079 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
15082 packages use a different font
15083 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
15084 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15090 \begin_layout Standard
15091 We've been using the
15095 style all over the place in this document.
15096 Here's one more example:
15099 \begin_layout Quotation
15103 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
15105 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
15111 \begin_layout Standard
15112 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
15113 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
15114 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
15115 the common tendency to overuse
15116 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
15118 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
15123 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
15125 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
15129 \begin_layout Standard
15131 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
15132 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
15133 only as font changes and integrated in the
15141 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
15144 always reset to the default font using the key binding
15151 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
15153 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
15157 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
15160 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15162 \begin_inset space ~
15165 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15167 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15177 arg "dialog-show character"
15183 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15185 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
15191 arg "dialog-show character"
15195 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15201 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
15203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15205 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
15212 \begin_layout Standard
15214 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
15215 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
15217 \begin_inset space ~
15221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15223 reference "subsec:Modules"
15230 ), or local layout settings (see section
15231 \begin_inset space ~
15235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15237 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
15242 As the two builtin styles, they provide
15246 markup for specific functions.
15247 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
15252 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
15262 \begin_inset Quotes els
15266 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15272 \begin_layout Standard
15274 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
15275 These styles can be found, if available, in the
15277 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15279 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006495
15281 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
15287 \begin_layout Standard
15289 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
15290 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
15295 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
15296 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
15297 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
15302 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
15303 \begin_inset Flex Emph
15306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15308 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
15316 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
15317 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
15318 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
15319 \begin_inset Flex Code
15322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15324 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
15333 \begin_inset Flex Strong
15336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15338 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
15347 \begin_inset Flex Noun
15350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15352 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
15361 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
15362 on screen their formal appearance.
15367 \begin_layout Subsection
15369 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15371 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15375 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15381 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15383 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15389 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15391 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15397 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15402 \begin_inset Index idx
15405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15414 \begin_layout Standard
15415 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15416 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15419 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15421 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15423 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15427 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15428 the properties of text passages
15429 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15433 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15434 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15435 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15436 from ordinary dialog.
15437 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15441 \begin_layout Standard
15443 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15444 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15445 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15446 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15447 the properties of the respective text passages.
15452 comes in as a last resort.
15457 \begin_layout Standard
15458 Before we document how to
15459 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15460 use custom character style
15461 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15462 tweak the text properties
15464 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15465 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15467 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15471 \begin_inset Newline newline
15474 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15475 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15478 \begin_layout Standard
15480 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15481 use custom character styles
15482 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15483 tweak text properties
15486 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15489 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15491 \begin_inset space ~
15494 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15502 arg "dialog-show character"
15505 dialog or press the toolbar button
15508 arg "dialog-show character"
15513 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15516 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15517 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15519 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15522 property that you can choose.
15523 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15526 \begin_inset space ~
15531 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15533 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15537 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15539 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15544 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15545 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15546 environments all at once.
15549 \begin_layout Standard
15551 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15553 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006625
15557 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006625
15559 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15563 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006629
15565 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006628
15570 , and their options (in addition to
15573 \begin_inset space ~
15579 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15583 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15591 \begin_layout Labeling
15592 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15606 The possible options are:
15610 \begin_layout Labeling
15611 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15616 This is the Roman font family.
15617 Normally a serif font.
15618 It's also the default family.
15628 \begin_layout Labeling
15629 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15633 \begin_inset space ~
15640 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15652 \begin_layout Labeling
15653 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15660 This is the Typewriter font family.
15666 arg "font-typewriter"
15672 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15676 \begin_layout Standard
15678 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15679 The general differences of these families are:
15682 \begin_layout Itemize
15684 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15689 fonts use characters with serifs.
15690 These are the small
15691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15698 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15699 The following example shows the difference:
15700 \begin_inset Newline newline
15704 \begin_inset Newline newline
15709 text without serifs
15712 \begin_inset Newline newline
15715 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15716 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15723 \begin_layout Itemize
15725 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15730 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15731 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15732 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15735 \begin_layout Itemize
15737 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15750 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15768 \begin_inset Newline newline
15772 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15777 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15790 \begin_inset Note Note
15793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15795 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15796 For more on phantoms see section
15797 \begin_inset space ~
15801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15803 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15813 \begin_inset Newline newline
15822 \begin_layout Labeling
15823 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15828 This corresponds to the print weight.
15833 \begin_layout Labeling
15834 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15839 This is the Medium font series.
15840 It's also the default series.
15843 \begin_layout Labeling
15844 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15851 This is the Bold font series.
15864 \begin_layout Labeling
15865 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15870 As the name implies.
15875 \begin_layout Labeling
15876 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15881 This is the Upright font shape.
15882 It's also the default shape.
15885 \begin_layout Labeling
15886 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15896 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15901 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15906 s the Italic font shape
15912 \begin_layout Labeling
15913 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15920 This is the Slanted font shape
15922 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15923 , this is different from italic).
15926 \begin_layout Labeling
15927 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15931 \begin_inset space ~
15938 This is the Small caps font shape
15945 \begin_layout Labeling
15946 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15948 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
15953 Alters the text color.
15954 Note that not all DVI
15955 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15957 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
15958 viewers are able to display colors.
15962 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15964 \begin_inset space ~
15968 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
15971 , which means that the document default color set in
15973 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15974 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15980 \begin_inset space ~
15986 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15988 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
15990 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15992 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
16070 \begin_inset Index idx
16073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16080 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
16086 \begin_layout Labeling
16087 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16089 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
16094 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
16095 the language of the document.
16096 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
16097 workarea in blue to
16098 indicate the change
16099 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
16100 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
16102 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
16104 \begin_inset Newline newline
16107 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
16109 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
16110 When using the spell checking (see section
16111 \begin_inset space ~
16115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16117 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
16121 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
16122 \begin_inset Newline newline
16125 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
16127 Exclude from Spellchecking
16130 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
16131 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
16135 \begin_layout Labeling
16136 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16141 Alters the size of the font.
16143 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
16145 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
16149 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
16152 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
16153 document font size.
16154 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
16155 the details, but a general description of what
16161 \begin_layout Labeling
16162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16183 arg "font-size tiny"
16189 \begin_layout Labeling
16190 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16211 arg "font-size scriptsize"
16217 \begin_layout Labeling
16218 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16239 arg "font-size footnotesize"
16245 \begin_layout Labeling
16246 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16267 arg "font-size small"
16273 \begin_layout Labeling
16274 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16288 It's also the default size.
16292 arg "font-size normal"
16298 \begin_layout Labeling
16299 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16320 arg "font-size large"
16326 \begin_layout Labeling
16327 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16348 arg "font-size larger"
16354 \begin_layout Labeling
16355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16376 arg "font-size largest"
16382 \begin_layout Labeling
16383 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16404 arg "font-size huge"
16410 \begin_layout Labeling
16411 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16432 arg "font-size giant"
16438 \begin_layout Labeling
16439 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16444 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16464 arg "font-size increase"
16470 \begin_layout Labeling
16471 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16476 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16496 arg "font-size decrease"
16502 \begin_layout Standard
16507 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16508 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16510 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16511 — use those instead.
16512 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16513 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006744
16518 \begin_layout Standard
16520 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006776
16521 Another combo box allows to tweak
16528 \begin_layout Labeling
16529 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16531 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
16536 Alters the text color.
16537 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
16542 , which means that the document default color set in
16544 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16545 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16551 \begin_inset space ~
16556 is used, you can select
16633 \begin_inset Index idx
16636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16638 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
16651 \begin_layout Labeling
16652 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16654 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16658 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16664 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16665 change a few other things at the character level
16666 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16667 have text passages being underlined
16671 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16672 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16673 days, when you could not change fonts.
16674 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16675 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16676 because some people
16680 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16687 \begin_layout Labeling
16688 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16690 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16697 This is text with emphasize on
16700 This might seem like the same as
16704 , but it is actually a bit different.
16710 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16712 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16713 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16717 \begin_layout Labeling
16718 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16720 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16725 Don't use underlining.
16730 \begin_layout Labeling
16731 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16733 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16737 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16745 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16747 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16756 arg "font-underline"
16762 \begin_inset Newline newline
16766 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16769 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16770 when you could not change fonts.
16771 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16772 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16773 because some people
16777 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16782 \begin_layout Labeling
16783 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16787 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16789 \begin_inset space ~
16798 This is text with Double under
16799 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16801 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16810 arg "font-underunderline"
16814 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16816 \begin_inset Newline newline
16819 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16820 about double underbar
16825 \begin_layout Labeling
16826 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16830 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16832 \begin_inset space ~
16841 This is text with Wavy under
16842 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16844 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16853 arg "font-underwave"
16857 \begin_inset Newline newline
16860 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16861 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16862 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16867 \begin_layout Labeling
16868 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16870 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16875 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16881 \begin_layout Labeling
16882 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16884 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16889 Don't use strikethrough.
16892 \begin_layout Labeling
16893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16897 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16899 \begin_inset space ~
16903 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16911 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16913 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16914 Single strikethrough
16922 arg "font-strikeout"
16926 \begin_inset Newline newline
16929 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16930 changed in the meantime.
16933 \begin_layout Labeling
16934 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16936 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16940 \begin_inset space ~
16944 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16946 \begin_inset space ~
16950 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16958 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16960 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16966 \begin_inset Newline newline
16969 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16973 \begin_layout Standard
16975 \change_inserted 630872221 1621007597
16976 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
16979 \begin_layout Labeling
16980 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16982 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006898
16987 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
16988 the language of the document.
16989 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
16990 workarea in blue to
16991 indicate the change.
16992 \begin_inset Newline newline
16995 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
16997 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
16998 When using the spell checking (see section
16999 \begin_inset space ~
17003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17005 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
17009 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
17010 \begin_inset Newline newline
17013 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
17015 Exclude from Spellchecking
17018 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
17021 \begin_layout Standard
17023 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
17024 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
17025 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
17026 \begin_inset space ~
17030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17032 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
17037 \change_inserted 630872221 1621181776
17041 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
17047 \begin_layout Itemize
17049 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
17056 This is text with emphasize on
17061 \begin_layout Itemize
17065 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
17072 This is text with Noun on.
17074 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
17081 , this is a logical attribute.
17082 Normally it's equivalent to
17085 \begin_inset space ~
17095 \begin_layout Standard
17096 So you have a huge number of combinations to
17097 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
17099 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
17104 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
17105 chosen a new character style
17106 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
17107 applied a text property
17110 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
17113 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17115 \begin_inset space ~
17118 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17126 arg "dialog-show character"
17132 arg "dialog-show character"
17135 ) dialog, the settings are
17136 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
17140 You can activate the
17141 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
17143 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
17144 last applied properties
17146 by using the toolbar button
17149 arg "textstyle-apply"
17153 The button lets you apply
17154 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
17155 your custom character style
17156 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
17159 even when the dialog isn't visible.
17161 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
17162 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
17163 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
17164 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
17169 \begin_layout Standard
17170 To completely reset the
17171 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
17173 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
17174 text properties of a selection
17176 to the default, use
17177 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
17179 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
17189 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
17194 from the menu of the toolbar button
17197 arg "textstyle-apply"
17204 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
17205 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
17206 you just set the shape to
17207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17225 \begin_inset space ~
17239 \begin_layout Standard
17241 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17242 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
17250 \begin_inset space ~
17262 \begin_layout Itemize
17264 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17277 font, which means every character has the same width; the
17278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17295 \begin_inset Newline newline
17299 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17313 \begin_inset Note Note
17316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17317 For more on phantoms see section
17318 \begin_inset space ~
17322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17324 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17334 \begin_inset Newline newline
17340 \begin_layout Itemize
17342 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17347 fonts use characters with serifs.
17348 These are the small
17349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17356 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17357 The following example shows the difference:
17358 \begin_inset Newline newline
17362 \begin_inset Newline newline
17367 text without serifs
17370 \begin_inset Newline newline
17373 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17374 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17381 \begin_layout Itemize
17383 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17388 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17389 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17390 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17395 \begin_layout Standard
17397 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
17398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17405 refers to applying or removing font properties.
17406 When a property is marked for toggling in the
17409 \begin_inset space ~
17414 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
17415 the property to be removed.
17416 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
17417 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
17418 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
17421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17436 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
17437 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
17438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17445 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
17449 \begin_inset space ~
17454 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
17457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17465 If you, for example, set
17466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17484 \begin_inset space ~
17489 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
17491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17498 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
17503 \begin_layout Standard
17505 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
17508 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
17509 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17512 \begin_layout Section
17513 Printing and Previewing
17516 \begin_layout Subsection
17520 \begin_layout Standard
17521 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
17522 using \SpecialChar LyX
17523 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17524 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
17525 goes on behind-the-scenes.
17526 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17528 Additional Features
17533 \begin_layout Standard
17535 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17538 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17539 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
17540 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17543 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17544 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
17545 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17546 to turn your writing into printable output.
17547 This happens in two stages:
17550 \begin_layout Enumerate
17551 First, \SpecialChar LyX
17552 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17554 a file with the extension,
17555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17569 \begin_layout Enumerate
17570 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17571 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17572 to use the commands in the
17576 file to produce printable output.
17579 \begin_layout Subsection
17580 Output file formats
17581 \begin_inset Index idx
17584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17593 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17600 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17602 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
17604 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
17608 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
17612 \begin_inset Index idx
17615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17617 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
17619 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
17630 \begin_layout Standard
17631 This file type has the extension
17632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17644 It contains your document as plain text
17645 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
17647 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
17648 following the rules of the
17649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17652 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17661 \begin_layout Standard
17662 You can export your document to
17663 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
17665 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
17670 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17671 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17673 \begin_inset space ~
17679 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17680 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17681 bibliography (section
17682 \begin_inset space ~
17686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17688 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17693 If your document includes such material, use
17695 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17696 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17698 \begin_inset space ~
17702 \begin_inset space ~
17706 \begin_inset space ~
17714 \begin_inset space ~
17718 \begin_inset space ~
17724 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17725 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
17726 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
17728 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
17734 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17737 \begin_inset Index idx
17740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17741 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17750 \begin_layout Standard
17751 This file type has the extension
17752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17763 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17766 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17767 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17768 -Errors or to process it manually
17769 with console commands.
17770 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17771 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17772 's temporary directory whenever you
17773 view or export your document.
17776 \begin_layout Standard
17777 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17778 -file using the menu
17780 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17781 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17785 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17786 export variants are explained in section
17787 \begin_inset space ~
17791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17793 reference "subsec:Export"
17800 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17802 \begin_inset Index idx
17805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17814 \begin_layout Standard
17815 This file type has the extension
17816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17836 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17837 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17838 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17842 \begin_layout Standard
17843 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17844 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17845 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17846 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17847 when you view the DVI.
17848 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17851 \begin_layout Standard
17852 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17854 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17855 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17860 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17861 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17863 \begin_inset space ~
17869 The latter option uses the program
17871 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17877 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17880 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17881 font access (see section
17882 \begin_inset space ~
17886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17888 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17893 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17894 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17899 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17901 \begin_inset Index idx
17904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17905 File formats ! PostScript
17913 \begin_layout Standard
17914 This file type has the extension
17915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17927 PostScript was developed by the company
17931 as a printer language.
17932 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17934 PostScript can be seen as a
17935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17938 programming language
17939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17942 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17947 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17954 \begin_inset Index idx
17957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17959 packages ! pstricks
17969 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17972 \begin_layout Standard
17973 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17977 Encapsulated PostScript
17978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17981 (EPS, file extension
17982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17994 As \SpecialChar LyX
17995 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17996 convert them in the background to EPS.
17997 If, for example, you have 50
17998 \begin_inset space ~
18001 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
18003 \begin_inset space ~
18006 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
18007 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
18009 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
18010 EPS to avoid this problem.
18013 \begin_layout Standard
18014 You can export to PostScript using the menu
18016 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18017 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18025 \begin_inset Index idx
18028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18035 \begin_inset Index idx
18038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18047 \begin_layout Standard
18048 This file type has the extension
18049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18065 Portable Document Format
18066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18073 was derived from PostScript.
18074 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
18076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18083 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
18084 looks exactly the same.
18087 \begin_layout Standard
18088 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
18089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18092 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18096 (JPG, file extension
18097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18124 Portable Network Graphics
18125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18128 (PNG, file extension
18129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18141 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
18142 converts them in the
18143 background to one of these formats.
18144 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
18145 will slow down your workflow.
18146 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
18149 \begin_layout Standard
18150 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
18152 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18158 \begin_layout Description
18160 \begin_inset space ~
18163 (pdflatex) This uses the program
18167 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18170 \begin_layout Description
18172 \begin_inset space ~
18179 ) This uses the program
18181 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18184 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18187 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18190 is a new engine, derived from
18194 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
18195 access (see section
18196 \begin_inset space ~
18200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18202 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18207 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18208 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
18213 \begin_layout Description
18215 \begin_inset space ~
18222 ) This uses the program
18227 that converts your file directly to PDF.
18233 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
18234 font access (see section
18235 \begin_inset space ~
18239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18241 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18246 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
18247 vertically written Japanese.
18250 \begin_layout Description
18252 \begin_inset space ~
18255 (cropped) This is the same as
18258 \begin_inset space ~
18263 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
18264 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
18265 to generate good-looking
18266 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
18269 \begin_layout Description
18271 \begin_inset space ~
18274 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
18278 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
18282 \begin_layout Description
18284 \begin_inset space ~
18287 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
18291 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
18292 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
18296 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
18297 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
18300 \begin_layout Standard
18304 \begin_inset space ~
18313 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
18314 works without problems.
18315 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
18316 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
18320 \begin_inset space ~
18328 \begin_inset space ~
18333 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
18341 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18343 \begin_inset Index idx
18346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18347 FileFormats ! XHTML
18353 \begin_inset Index idx
18356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18365 \begin_layout Standard
18366 This file type has the extension
18367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18379 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
18380 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
18381 When \SpecialChar LyX
18382 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
18383 suitable for the purpose.
18384 For the math output you can choose in the menu
18386 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18387 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18390 between different formats, which are described in section
18392 Math Output in XHTML
18397 \begin_inset space ~
18405 \begin_layout Standard
18406 XHTML output remains
18407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18414 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
18415 features are supported yet.
18419 and the World Wide Web
18423 Additional Features
18425 manual, for more information.
18428 \begin_layout Standard
18429 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
18431 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18432 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18438 \begin_layout Subsection
18440 \begin_inset Index idx
18443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18452 \begin_layout Standard
18453 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
18454 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
18463 or use the toolbar button
18470 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
18471 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
18472 \begin_inset space ~
18476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18478 reference "sec:File-Formats"
18482 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
18484 \begin_inset space ~
18488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18490 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
18495 Further output formats can be selected via
18497 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18498 View (Other Formats)
18500 or the toolbar button
18509 \begin_layout Standard
18510 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
18511 viewer window using the menu
18513 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18518 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18519 Update (Other Formats)
18524 \begin_layout Standard
18525 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18528 To have a real output, export your document.
18531 \begin_layout Section
18532 A few Words about Typography
18533 \begin_inset Index idx
18536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18545 \begin_layout Subsection
18546 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
18547 \begin_inset Index idx
18550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18557 \begin_inset Index idx
18560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18569 \begin_layout Standard
18570 In \SpecialChar LyX
18572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18583 symbol comes in four variants: the
18600 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18606 \begin_layout Standard
18607 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18617 height_special "totalheight"
18622 backgroundcolor "none"
18625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18626 \begin_inset Tabular
18627 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18628 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18629 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18630 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18631 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18632 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18633 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18661 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18662 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18701 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18702 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18724 system key combination
18728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18729 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18741 and the em dash with
18744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18757 is the Mac label for the right
18767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18780 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18781 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18803 system key combination or
18804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18818 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18831 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18870 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18876 \begin_layout Standard
18877 Dashes can also be inserted with
18879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18881 \begin_inset space ~
18884 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18892 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18893 and 2014 for the en dash).
18896 \begin_layout Standard
18897 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18898 mode and has a length of its own.
18899 Here are some examples:
18902 \begin_layout Enumerate
18903 line- and page-breaks
18904 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18914 \begin_layout Enumerate
18916 \begin_inset space ~
18920 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18930 \begin_layout Enumerate
18931 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18932 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18942 \begin_layout Enumerate
18943 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18947 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18957 \begin_layout Standard
18959 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18961 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18962 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18970 \begin_layout Subsection
18971 Dashes and Line Breaks
18972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18974 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18981 \begin_layout Standard
18982 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18983 case and locale, e.
18984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18990 \begin_layout Itemize
18991 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18992 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18995 \begin_layout Itemize
18996 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
19000 \begin_layout Itemize
19001 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
19002 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
19005 \begin_layout Standard
19006 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
19007 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19018 allows line breaks after hyphens
19019 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
19021 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
19024 en-dashes and em-dashes.
19027 \begin_layout Enumerate
19028 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
19029 \begin_inset space ~
19032 – common in British English and generally recommended by
19034 The Elements of Typographic Style
19037 \begin_inset space ~
19040 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
19043 \begin_layout Enumerate
19044 Unwanted line breaks
19049 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
19051 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
19054 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
19058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19061 Prevent Hyphenation
19066 \begin_inset space ~
19082 in \SpecialChar TeX
19084 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
19085 , a protected space does not suffice
19089 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
19094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19096 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
19097 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
19098 in the document language.
19099 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
19113 \begin_layout Itemize
19115 \begin_inset space ~
19119 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19129 height_special "totalheight"
19134 backgroundcolor "none"
19137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19146 \begin_layout Itemize
19148 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19158 height_special "totalheight"
19163 backgroundcolor "none"
19166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19168 \begin_inset space ~
19176 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19177 \begin_inset space ~
19180 – sont très utiles.
19183 \begin_layout Itemize
19188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19197 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
19201 \begin_layout Standard
19202 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
19203 \begin_inset space ~
19206 – in contrast to an overfull line
19207 \begin_inset space ~
19210 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19214 \begin_layout Standard
19215 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
19218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19219 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19220 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19221 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19226 \begin_layout Enumerate
19227 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
19228 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
19229 or \SpecialChar TeX
19235 \begin_layout Itemize
19237 \begin_inset space ~
19240 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19241 \begin_inset space ~
19244 – sont très utiles.
19248 \begin_layout Enumerate
19249 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
19250 \begin_inset Newline newline
19255 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19256 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19258 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
19260 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
19262 \begin_inset space ~
19268 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
19270 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
19272 \begin_inset space ~
19283 \begin_layout Itemize
19284 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
19285 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
19286 should be followed by
19287 a line break opportunity.
19290 \begin_layout Standard
19291 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
19292 \begin_inset space ~
19296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19298 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19309 \begin_layout Enumerate
19310 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19311 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
19312 or en dashes (see section
19313 \begin_inset space ~
19317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19319 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19329 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19330 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
19333 \begin_layout Standard
19334 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
19336 \begin_inset space ~
19339 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
19340 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
19342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19349 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
19350 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
19358 \begin_layout Standard
19359 Since \SpecialChar LyX
19361 \begin_inset space ~
19364 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19366 prevents ligation to dashes.
19368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19375 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
19380 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
19381 after the input (unless the current text font is
19389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19390 The behavior was changed since
19391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19406 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
19407 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
19408 as non-breakable dashes.
19409 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
19417 \begin_layout Standard
19420 \begin_inset space ~
19428 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
19430 \begin_inset space ~
19433 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
19436 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19437 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19438 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19439 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19441 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
19445 If you used both literal and
19446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19453 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
19455 \begin_inset space ~
19458 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
19459 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
19462 \begin_layout Subsection
19464 \begin_inset Index idx
19467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19476 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
19483 \begin_layout Standard
19484 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
19485 but automatically in the output.
19486 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19492 \begin_inset Index idx
19495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19502 following the rules of the document language.
19504 does not hyphenate text in the
19508 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19511 \begin_layout Standard
19513 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
19517 font and with unusual constructs, like
19518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19526 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19527 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
19528 This is done with the menu
19530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19531 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19533 \begin_inset space ~
19539 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19541 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19545 \begin_layout Standard
19546 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19547 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
19549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19558 would then see the hyphen
19559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19566 as a line break possibility.
19567 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19568 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
19571 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19572 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19575 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
19577 Prevent Hyphenation
19582 \begin_inset space ~
19590 \begin_layout Subsection
19592 \begin_inset Index idx
19595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19605 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19608 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19615 \begin_layout Standard
19616 When \SpecialChar LyX
19617 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19618 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19620 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19626 appropriate amount of space.
19627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19630 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19632 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19633 gets after another word.
19636 \begin_layout Standard
19637 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19638 not work in all cases.
19640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19651 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19652 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19655 \begin_layout Standard
19656 Here are some examples of
19660 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19663 \begin_layout Itemize
19668 \begin_layout Itemize
19673 \begin_layout Standard
19674 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19677 \begin_layout Itemize
19679 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19683 this is too much space!
19686 \begin_layout Itemize
19691 \begin_layout Standard
19692 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19695 \begin_layout Standard
19696 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19699 \begin_layout Enumerate
19703 \begin_inset space ~
19708 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19709 \begin_inset space ~
19713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19715 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19720 \begin_inset Index idx
19723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19724 Spaces ! inter-word
19732 \begin_layout Enumerate
19736 \begin_inset space ~
19741 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19742 \begin_inset space ~
19746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19748 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19753 \begin_inset Index idx
19756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19765 \begin_layout Enumerate
19769 \begin_inset space ~
19773 \begin_inset space ~
19777 \begin_inset space ~
19784 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19786 \begin_inset space ~
19791 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19792 This function is also bound to
19795 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19801 \begin_layout Standard
19802 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19805 \begin_layout Itemize
19807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19811 \begin_inset space \space{}
19814 this is too much space!
19817 \begin_layout Itemize
19818 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19822 \begin_layout Standard
19823 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19824 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19826 will take care of this.
19829 \begin_layout Standard
19830 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19834 \begin_inset space ~
19840 feature described in the section
19842 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19847 Additional Features
19852 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19854 \begin_inset Index idx
19857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19858 Typography ! Quotation marks
19864 \begin_inset Index idx
19867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19868 Quotation marks | see
19872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19898 \begin_layout Standard
19900 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19901 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19902 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19912 The keyboard character,
19916 , generates this automatically.
19919 \begin_layout Standard
19920 You can specify what character the
19924 key produces by using the submenu
19930 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19934 \begin_inset Index idx
19937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19938 Document ! Settings
19943 dialog and switching the
19947 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19948 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19950 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
19952 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
19956 \begin_inset space ~
19962 \begin_layout Labeling
19963 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19975 \begin_inset space ~
19979 \begin_inset space ~
19983 \begin_inset Quotes els
19987 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20001 \begin_inset Quotes els
20005 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20008 quotation marks (as common, e.
20009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20015 \begin_layout Labeling
20016 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20019 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20023 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20027 \begin_inset space ~
20031 \begin_inset space ~
20035 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20039 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20045 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20049 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20053 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20057 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20060 quotation marks (as common, e.
20061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20067 \begin_layout Labeling
20068 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20071 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20075 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20079 \begin_inset space ~
20083 \begin_inset space ~
20087 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20091 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20097 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20101 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20105 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20109 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20112 quotation marks (as common, e.
20113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20119 \begin_layout Labeling
20120 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20123 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20127 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20131 \begin_inset space ~
20135 \begin_inset space ~
20139 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20143 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20149 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20153 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20157 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20161 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20164 quotation marks (as common, e.
20165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20171 \begin_layout Labeling
20172 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20175 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20179 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20183 \begin_inset space ~
20187 \begin_inset space ~
20191 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20195 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20201 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20205 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20209 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20213 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20216 quotation marks (as common, e.
20217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20220 g., in Switzerland)
20223 \begin_layout Labeling
20224 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20227 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20231 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20235 \begin_inset space ~
20239 \begin_inset space ~
20243 \begin_inset Quotes als
20247 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20253 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20257 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20261 \begin_inset Quotes als
20265 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20268 quotation marks (as common, e.
20269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20275 \begin_layout Labeling
20276 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20279 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20283 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20287 \begin_inset space ~
20291 \begin_inset space ~
20295 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20299 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20305 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20309 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20313 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20317 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20320 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
20323 \begin_layout Labeling
20324 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20327 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20331 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20335 \begin_inset space ~
20339 \begin_inset space ~
20343 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20347 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20353 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20357 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20361 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20365 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20368 quotation marks (as common, e.
20369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20372 g., in Great Britain)
20375 \begin_layout Labeling
20376 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20379 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20383 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20387 \begin_inset space ~
20391 \begin_inset space ~
20395 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20399 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20405 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20409 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20413 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20417 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20420 quotation marks (as common, e.
20421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20427 \begin_layout Labeling
20428 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20431 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20435 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20439 \begin_inset space ~
20443 \begin_inset space ~
20447 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20451 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20457 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20461 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20465 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20469 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20472 quotation marks (another style common in France)
20476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20477 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
20478 since these look identical to the inner marks.
20479 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
20480 the inner marks differ).
20488 \begin_layout Labeling
20489 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20492 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20496 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20500 \begin_inset space ~
20504 \begin_inset space ~
20508 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20512 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20518 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20522 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20526 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20530 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20533 quotation marks (as common, e.
20534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20540 \begin_layout Labeling
20541 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20544 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20548 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20552 \begin_inset space ~
20556 \begin_inset space ~
20560 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20564 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20570 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20574 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20578 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20582 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20585 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
20586 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
20590 \begin_layout Labeling
20591 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20593 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
20596 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20600 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20604 \begin_inset space ~
20608 \begin_inset space ~
20612 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20616 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20624 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20632 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20640 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20648 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20653 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
20658 \begin_layout Labeling
20659 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20660 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20668 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20674 \begin_inset space ~
20678 \begin_inset space ~
20684 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20692 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20696 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20700 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20704 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20708 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20711 quotation marks (as common, e.
20712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20721 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
20722 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20724 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
20730 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20731 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20739 \begin_layout Labeling
20740 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20741 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20749 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20755 \begin_inset space ~
20759 \begin_inset space ~
20765 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20773 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20777 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20781 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20785 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20789 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20792 quotation marks (as common, e.
20793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20796 g., in North Korea and China)
20797 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20799 \begin_inset script superscript
20801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20803 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20806 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
20821 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
20826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20827 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20828 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20838 \begin_layout Standard
20839 Inner quotation marks
20843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20844 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20845 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20846 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20854 does not necessarily mean
20855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20863 This is why we call them
20864 \begin_inset Quotes els
20868 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20884 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20886 \begin_inset Quotes els
20890 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20893 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20896 arg "quote-insert inner"
20901 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20907 \begin_layout Standard
20908 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20909 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20910 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20911 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20912 If you check the setting
20914 Use dynamic quotation marks
20918 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20919 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20922 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20923 they appear in a special color).
20924 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20925 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20927 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20930 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20933 \begin_layout Standard
20934 Individual quotation marks (i.
20935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20938 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20939 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20943 \begin_layout Subsection
20945 \begin_inset Index idx
20948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20949 Typography ! Ligatures
20955 \begin_inset Index idx
20958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20989 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20996 \begin_layout Standard
20997 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20998 print them as single characters.
20999 These groups are known as
21004 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
21005 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
21007 Here are the standard ligatures:
21010 \begin_layout Itemize
21014 \begin_layout Itemize
21018 \begin_layout Itemize
21022 \begin_layout Itemize
21026 \begin_layout Itemize
21030 \begin_layout Standard
21031 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
21034 \begin_layout Standard
21035 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
21036 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
21037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21044 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
21045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21060 To break a ligature, use
21062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21063 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21065 \begin_inset space ~
21072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21083 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21100 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21108 \begin_layout Subsection
21110 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
21112 \begin_inset Index idx
21115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21125 \begin_layout Standard
21128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21129 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
21133 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
21136 \begin_layout Description
21138 The name of the game.
21141 \begin_layout Description
21143 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
21147 \begin_layout Description
21149 The \SpecialChar TeX
21150 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
21154 \begin_layout Description
21155 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
21156 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21160 \begin_layout Standard
21161 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21167 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
21171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21175 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
21176 world to give programs geek version numbers.
21177 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
21178 converges to the number
21179 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
21182 : The actual version is
21183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21191 , the previous one was
21192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21203 \begin_layout Subsection
21205 \begin_inset Index idx
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 \begin_layout Standard
21218 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
21219 space between two words.
21220 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
21223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21230 for units use the menu
21232 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21233 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21235 \begin_inset space ~
21243 arg "space-insert thin"
21249 \begin_layout Standard
21250 Here is an example to show the differences:
21253 \begin_layout Standard
21254 \begin_inset Tabular
21255 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
21256 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21257 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21258 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21265 \begin_inset space ~
21269 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21281 space between number and unit
21288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21297 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21309 half space between number and unit
21322 \begin_layout Subsection
21324 \begin_inset Index idx
21327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21328 Typography ! Widows and orphans
21336 \begin_layout Standard
21337 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
21339 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
21340 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
21341 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
21342 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
21343 These bits of text became known as
21354 \begin_layout Standard
21355 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
21356 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
21357 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
21358 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
21359 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
21360 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
21361 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
21362 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
21363 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
21364 \begin_inset Newline newline
21372 \begin_inset Newline newline
21380 \begin_inset Newline newline
21383 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21384 preamble of your document to avoid them.
21385 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
21387 \begin_inset space ~
21391 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21393 key "latexcompanion"
21399 \begin_inset space ~
21403 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21410 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21411 's page break mechanism.
21414 \begin_layout Chapter
21415 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
21416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21418 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
21425 \begin_layout Standard
21426 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21429 \begin_inset space ~
21435 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21438 \begin_layout Section
21440 \begin_inset Index idx
21443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21459 \begin_layout Standard
21461 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
21464 \begin_layout Description
21467 \begin_inset space ~
21470 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
21471 \begin_inset Newline newline
21475 \begin_inset Note Note
21478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21479 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
21487 \begin_layout Description
21488 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
21489 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
21490 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21493 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
21494 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
21496 \begin_inset space ~
21502 \begin_inset Newline newline
21506 \begin_inset Note Comment
21509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
21519 \begin_layout Description
21521 \begin_inset space ~
21524 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
21525 set in the document settings under
21527 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
21529 \begin_inset space ~
21535 \begin_inset Newline newline
21539 \begin_inset Newline newline
21543 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21552 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
21553 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
21558 of a comment that appears in the output.
21564 \begin_inset Newline newline
21568 \begin_inset Newline newline
21571 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
21574 \begin_layout Standard
21575 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
21583 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21587 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
21590 \begin_layout Section
21592 \begin_inset Index idx
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21604 name "sec:Footnotes"
21611 \begin_layout Standard
21613 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
21616 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21619 or the toolbar button
21622 arg "footnote-insert"
21634 \begin_inset Graphics
21635 filename clipart/footnote.png
21644 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21645 's representation of your footnote.
21655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21674 label, the box will
21678 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
21679 Clicking on the box label again will close
21692 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
21693 and click on the footnote
21708 \begin_layout Standard
21709 Here is an example footnote:
21717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21718 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21726 \begin_layout Standard
21727 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21728 position where the footnote box is placed.
21729 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21730 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21731 according to the document class.
21733 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21734 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21740 ey are described in the
21743 \begin_inset space ~
21751 \begin_layout Section
21753 \begin_inset Index idx
21756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21765 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21772 \begin_layout Standard
21773 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21775 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21777 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21779 \begin_inset space ~
21784 or the toolbar button
21787 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21813 appearing within your text.
21814 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21815 's representation of your margin
21824 \begin_layout Standard
21825 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21829 \begin_inset Marginal
21832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21834 This is a marginal note.
21842 \begin_layout Standard
21843 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21844 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21845 pages, right on odd pages.
21848 \begin_layout Standard
21849 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21852 \begin_inset space ~
21860 \begin_inset space ~
21868 \begin_layout Section
21869 Graphics and Images
21870 \begin_inset Index idx
21873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21880 \begin_inset Index idx
21883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21892 name "sec:Graphics"
21899 \begin_layout Standard
21900 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21901 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21904 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21909 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21913 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21916 \begin_layout Standard
21917 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21922 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21923 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21925 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21926 \begin_inset space ~
21930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21932 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21939 \begin_layout Standard
21944 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21945 of the image in the output.
21946 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21950 \begin_inset space ~
21954 \begin_inset space ~
21963 \begin_inset space ~
21967 \begin_inset space ~
21971 \begin_inset space ~
21976 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21977 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21985 \begin_layout Standard
21989 \begin_inset space ~
21993 \begin_inset space ~
21998 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21999 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
22001 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
22006 \begin_inset space ~
22011 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
22012 with the image size is printed.
22015 \begin_layout Standard
22016 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
22017 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
22019 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
22022 \begin_layout Standard
22024 \begin_inset Graphics
22025 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
22033 \begin_layout Standard
22034 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
22035 the image into a float, see section
22036 \begin_inset space ~
22040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22042 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22049 \begin_layout Subsection
22051 \begin_inset Index idx
22054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22063 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
22070 \begin_layout Standard
22071 You can insert images in any known file format.
22072 But as we explained in section
22073 \begin_inset space ~
22077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22079 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22083 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
22085 therefore uses the program
22089 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
22090 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
22091 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
22092 \begin_inset space ~
22096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22098 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22105 \begin_layout Standard
22106 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
22109 \begin_layout Description
22111 \begin_inset space ~
22114 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
22115 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
22116 Well-known bitmap image formats are
22117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22120 Graphics Interchange Format
22121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22124 (GIF, file extension
22125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22137 \begin_inset Index idx
22140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22172 Portable Network Graphics
22173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22176 (PNG, file extension
22177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22189 \begin_inset Index idx
22192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22224 Joint Photographic Experts Group
22225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22228 (JPG, file extension
22229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22253 \begin_inset Index idx
22256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22287 \begin_layout Description
22289 \begin_inset space ~
22292 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
22294 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
22295 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
22296 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
22297 \begin_inset Newline newline
22300 Scalable image formats can be
22301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22304 Scalable Vector Graphics
22305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22308 (SVG, file extension
22309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22321 \begin_inset Index idx
22324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22356 Encapsulated PostScript
22357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22360 (EPS, file extension
22361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22373 \begin_inset Index idx
22376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22408 Portable Document Format
22409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22412 (PDF, file extension
22413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22425 \begin_inset Index idx
22428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22443 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
22444 result will not be scalable.
22445 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
22450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22451 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
22459 \begin_layout Standard
22460 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
22467 \begin_layout Subsection
22468 Grouping of Image Settings
22469 \begin_inset Index idx
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22473 Images ! Settings grouping
22481 \begin_layout Standard
22482 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
22484 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
22485 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
22487 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
22488 need to manually change each of them.
22491 \begin_layout Standard
22492 A new group can be set by pressing the button
22495 \begin_inset space ~
22499 \begin_inset space ~
22511 \begin_inset space ~
22515 \begin_inset space ~
22521 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
22522 and checking the name of the desired group.
22525 \begin_layout Section
22527 \begin_inset Index idx
22530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22546 \begin_layout Standard
22547 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
22550 arg "tabular-insert"
22555 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22559 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
22560 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
22561 , and you can select a specific (border) style
22564 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
22565 from the rest of the table.
22566 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
22567 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
22569 Here is an example table:
22572 \begin_layout Standard
22574 \begin_inset Tabular
22575 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
22576 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22577 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22578 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22579 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22580 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22774 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22778 \begin_layout Standard
22780 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22781 This corresponds to the
22782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22789 table style listed in the style selection.
22792 \begin_layout Standard
22794 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22795 Other available styles include:
22798 \begin_layout Itemize
22800 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22809 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22813 \begin_layout Itemize
22815 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22816 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22819 \begin_layout Itemize
22821 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22830 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22831 bold top/bottom lines (see
22841 \change_inserted 630872221 1621434190
22842 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last
22848 \begin_layout Standard
22850 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22851 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22852 button can be changed in
22854 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22855 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22859 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22863 \begin_layout Subsection
22867 \begin_layout Standard
22868 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22871 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22875 This brings up the table dialog.
22876 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22877 cursor is placed currently.
22878 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22879 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22880 done on all of your selection.
22883 \begin_layout Standard
22884 In addition to the table dialog, the
22887 \begin_inset space ~
22892 helps you in setting table properties.
22893 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22896 \begin_layout Standard
22900 \begin_inset space ~
22905 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22906 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22907 current cell respectively.
22908 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22910 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22911 of text, see section
22912 \begin_inset space ~
22916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22918 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22925 \begin_layout Standard
22926 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22927 using the check box
22936 This will merge the cells to
22940 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22941 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22942 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22943 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22944 in the last row without the upper border:
22947 \begin_layout Standard
22949 \begin_inset Tabular
22950 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22951 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22952 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22953 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22954 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22955 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22966 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22975 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23051 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23086 \begin_layout Standard
23087 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
23088 -arguments for the table.
23089 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
23090 explained in the chapter
23097 \begin_inset space ~
23103 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
23104 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
23105 but are visible in the output.
23108 \begin_layout Standard
23109 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
23112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23117 Most DVI-viewers are
23121 able to display rotations.
23129 \begin_layout Standard
23134 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
23139 adds lines for all cell borders.
23142 \begin_layout Subsection
23144 \begin_inset Index idx
23147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23148 Tables ! Multi-page
23154 \begin_inset Index idx
23157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23166 \begin_layout Standard
23167 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
23170 \begin_inset space ~
23174 \begin_inset space ~
23182 \begin_inset space ~
23187 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
23188 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
23191 \begin_layout Description
23196 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
23197 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
23198 Except for the first page, if
23201 \begin_inset space ~
23209 \begin_layout Description
23213 \begin_inset space ~
23218 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
23219 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
23222 \begin_layout Description
23227 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
23228 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
23229 except for the last page, if
23232 \begin_inset space ~
23240 \begin_layout Description
23244 \begin_inset space ~
23249 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
23250 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
23253 \begin_layout Description
23254 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
23255 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
23257 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23261 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
23264 \begin_inset space ~
23272 \begin_layout Standard
23273 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
23274 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
23275 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
23281 In this context, first means first in this order:
23284 \begin_inset space ~
23296 \begin_inset space ~
23301 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
23304 \begin_layout Standard
23306 \begin_inset Tabular
23307 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
23308 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
23309 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
23310 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23311 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23312 <row endfirsthead="true">
23313 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23319 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
23324 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23333 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23343 <row endfirsthead="true">
23344 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23355 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23364 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23376 <row endhead="true">
23377 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23388 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23397 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23407 <row endhead="true">
23408 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23419 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23428 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23440 <row endfoot="true">
23441 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23452 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23461 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23492 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24433 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24442 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24451 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24462 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24493 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24524 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24555 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24586 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24617 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24648 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24679 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24710 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24741 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24772 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24803 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24834 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24865 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24896 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24927 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24958 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24989 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25020 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25051 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25082 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25113 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25144 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25175 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25206 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25237 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25268 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25299 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25330 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25361 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25392 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25422 <row endlastfoot="true">
25423 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25434 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
25437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25443 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25460 \begin_layout Subsection
25462 \begin_inset Index idx
25465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25474 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
25481 \begin_layout Standard
25482 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
25483 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
25484 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
25485 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
25489 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
25492 \begin_layout Standard
25493 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
25494 for the column in the table dialog.
25495 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
25496 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
25500 \begin_layout Standard
25502 \begin_inset Tabular
25503 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
25504 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25505 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25506 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
25507 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25527 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25596 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25652 This is longer now.
25657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25708 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25709 This is longer now.
25714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25740 \begin_layout Standard
25741 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25742 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25747 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25748 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25753 Selection with the mouse or with
25757 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25758 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25759 the selection from outside the table.
25762 \begin_layout Section
25764 \begin_inset Index idx
25767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25783 \begin_layout Subsection
25787 \begin_layout Standard
25788 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25789 have a fixed location.
25791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25798 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25806 \begin_inset space ~
25811 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25812 too many notes on the current page.
25815 \begin_layout Standard
25816 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25817 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25818 and pages without text.
25819 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25820 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25821 Floats are therefore numbered.
25822 Referencing is described in section
25823 \begin_inset space ~
25827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25829 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25836 \begin_layout Standard
25837 To insert a float, use the menu
25839 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25843 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25844 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25846 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25847 \begin_inset Index idx
25850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25856 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25857 paragraph within the float.
25858 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25859 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25860 left-clicking on the box label.
25861 A closed float box looks like this:
25862 \begin_inset Graphics
25863 filename clipart/float.png
25868 – a gray button with a red label.
25871 \begin_layout Standard
25872 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25874 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25877 \begin_layout Subsection
25879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25881 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25886 \begin_inset Index idx
25889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25890 Floats ! Figure floats
25898 \begin_layout Standard
25900 \begin_inset space ~
25904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25906 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25910 was created using the menu
25912 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25913 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25919 arg "float-insert figure"
25923 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25926 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25932 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25936 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25937 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25939 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25941 \begin_inset space ~
25949 arg "layout-paragraph"
25955 \begin_layout Standard
25956 \begin_inset Float figure
25963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25965 \begin_inset Graphics
25966 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25976 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25979 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25981 name "fig:A-star-in"
25998 \begin_layout Standard
25999 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
26000 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
26002 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26011 ) and refer to it using the menu
26013 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26019 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26023 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
26024 vague references like
26025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26032 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
26033 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
26035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26043 For more about cross-references, see section
26044 \begin_inset space ~
26048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26050 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26057 \begin_layout Standard
26058 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
26059 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
26060 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
26061 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
26062 as described in section
26063 \begin_inset space ~
26067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26069 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26075 \begin_inset space ~
26079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26081 reference "fig:Two-images"
26085 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
26086 You can also set the images one below the other.
26088 \begin_inset space ~
26092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26094 reference "fig:Undefinable"
26099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26101 reference "fig:Star"
26105 are the subfigures.
26108 \begin_layout Standard
26109 \begin_inset Float figure
26116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26117 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26121 \begin_inset Float figure
26128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26129 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26134 name "fig:Undefinable"
26146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26147 \begin_inset Graphics
26148 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
26160 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26164 \begin_inset Float figure
26171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26172 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26190 \begin_inset Graphics
26191 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26203 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26210 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26215 name "fig:Two-images"
26232 \begin_layout Subsection
26234 \begin_inset Index idx
26237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26238 Floats ! Table floats
26246 \begin_layout Standard
26247 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
26249 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26250 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26253 or the toolbar button
26256 arg "float-insert table"
26260 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
26261 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
26262 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
26264 \begin_inset space ~
26268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26270 reference "tab:Table-float"
26277 \begin_layout Standard
26278 \begin_inset Float table
26285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26286 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26291 name "tab:Table-float"
26303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26305 \begin_inset Tabular
26306 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
26307 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26310 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26437 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
26445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26458 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26461 \end{array}\right]$
26469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26482 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
26503 \begin_layout Subsection
26505 \begin_inset Index idx
26508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26517 \begin_layout Standard
26519 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
26520 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
26521 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
26523 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
26531 \begin_inset space ~
26539 \begin_layout Section
26541 \begin_inset Index idx
26544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26553 \begin_layout Standard
26555 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
26557 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
26558 \begin_inset space \space{}
26564 \begin_layout Standard
26565 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
26566 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
26568 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26572 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
26573 and its alignment within the page.
26576 \begin_layout Standard
26578 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26588 height_special "totalheight"
26593 backgroundcolor "none"
26596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26599 This is a minipage.
26600 The text is set in an italic style.
26603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26606 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
26607 another formatting.
26615 \begin_layout Standard
26616 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26619 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
26623 as described in section
26624 \begin_inset space ~
26628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26630 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
26635 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26641 \begin_layout Standard
26642 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26652 height_special "totalheight"
26657 backgroundcolor "none"
26660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26661 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26662 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26668 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26672 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26682 height_special "totalheight"
26687 backgroundcolor "none"
26690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26691 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26692 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26700 \begin_layout Standard
26701 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26707 \begin_layout Standard
26708 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
26710 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26717 \begin_inset space ~
26725 \begin_layout Chapter
26726 Mathematical Formulas
26727 \begin_inset Index idx
26730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26737 \begin_inset Index idx
26740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26771 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26778 \begin_layout Standard
26779 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26784 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26787 \begin_layout Section
26789 \begin_inset Index idx
26792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26801 \begin_layout Standard
26802 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26815 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26817 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26818 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26819 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26821 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26827 \begin_layout Standard
26828 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26832 \begin_inset space ~
26837 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26840 \begin_layout Standard
26841 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26842 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26845 \begin_layout Standard
26846 This is a line with an inline formula
26847 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26853 \begin_layout Standard
26854 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26855 paragraph, like this one:
26856 \begin_inset Formula
26863 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26866 \begin_layout Standard
26868 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26870 For example, typing
26871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26884 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26885 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26889 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26892 \begin_inset space ~
26900 \begin_layout Subsection
26901 Navigating in Formulas
26902 \begin_inset Index idx
26905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26914 \begin_layout Standard
26915 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26916 achieved with the arrow keys.
26918 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26919 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26924 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26925 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26929 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26933 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26936 \end{array}\right]$
26944 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26949 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26950 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26953 \begin_layout Standard
26958 , printed in this document as
26959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26963 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26970 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26971 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26972 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26977 For example, if you want
26978 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26986 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26996 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27000 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27005 , since in the latter case only the
27008 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
27013 will be under the square root sign:
27014 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
27020 \begin_layout Standard
27021 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
27023 \begin_inset Formula
27025 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27034 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
27035 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
27038 \begin_layout Subsection
27042 \begin_layout Standard
27043 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
27044 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
27048 and a cursor movement key to select text.
27049 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
27050 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
27051 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
27052 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
27056 \begin_layout Subsection
27057 Exponents and Subscripts
27058 \begin_inset Index idx
27061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27068 \begin_inset Index idx
27071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27080 \begin_layout Standard
27081 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
27084 arg "math-superscript"
27090 arg "math-subscript"
27093 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
27095 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
27098 , type in a formula
27101 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27111 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
27117 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
27121 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
27127 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27133 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
27135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27142 , you have to use an extra
27146 to separate the circumflex and the character.
27147 For example, if you want
27148 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
27154 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27160 Subscripts are similar: To get
27161 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
27167 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27175 \begin_layout Subsection
27177 \begin_inset Index idx
27180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27189 \begin_layout Standard
27190 Create a fraction either with the command
27196 or by using the icon
27199 arg "math-insert \\frac"
27205 \begin_inset space ~
27211 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
27212 The cursor is above the fraction line.
27213 To move it to the bottom, simply press
27218 To move back up, press
27223 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
27224 \begin_inset Formula
27226 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
27229 \end{array}\right)}\right]
27237 \begin_layout Subsection
27239 \begin_inset Index idx
27242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27251 \begin_layout Standard
27252 Roots can be created using the
27255 \begin_inset space ~
27263 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
27269 arg "math-insert \\root"
27291 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
27297 always produces a square root.
27300 \begin_layout Subsection
27301 Operators with Limits
27302 \begin_inset Index idx
27305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27312 \begin_inset Index idx
27315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27324 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27331 \begin_layout Standard
27333 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
27337 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
27340 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
27341 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27342 by entering them as you would enter a super-
27343 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
27344 The sum operator will automatically place its
27345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27352 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
27354 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
27358 \begin_inset Formula
27360 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
27365 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
27369 \begin_layout Standard
27370 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
27372 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
27373 behind the operator and using the menu
27375 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27376 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27378 \begin_inset space ~
27382 \begin_inset space ~
27396 \begin_layout Standard
27397 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
27398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27406 \begin_inset Index idx
27409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27416 \begin_inset Formula
27418 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
27423 which will place the
27424 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
27428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27436 In inline formulas it looks like this:
27437 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
27443 \begin_layout Standard
27444 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
27451 Have a look at section
27452 \begin_inset space ~
27456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27458 reference "subsec:Functions"
27462 for an explanation of function macros.
27465 \begin_layout Subsection
27467 \begin_inset Index idx
27470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27479 \begin_layout Standard
27480 Most math symbols can be found in the
27483 \begin_inset space ~
27488 under one of several categories; including
27505 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
27509 \begin_layout Standard
27510 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27511 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
27512 don't have to use the
27515 \begin_inset space ~
27520 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
27522 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
27525 \begin_layout Subsection
27527 \begin_inset Index idx
27530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27539 \begin_layout Standard
27540 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
27546 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
27552 \begin_inset space ~
27560 arg "math-insert \\space"
27564 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
27565 For example, the sequence
27570 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
27573 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27575 \begin_inset Graphics
27576 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
27581 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
27582 the space marker and enter space again several times.
27583 With every space enter the size will be changed.
27584 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
27585 , because they are negative
27587 Here are two examples:
27590 \begin_layout Standard
27600 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
27606 \begin_layout Standard
27616 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
27622 \begin_layout Subsection
27624 \begin_inset Index idx
27627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27636 name "subsec:Functions"
27643 \begin_layout Standard
27647 \begin_inset space ~
27652 contains under the button
27655 arg "math-insert \\functions"
27658 a number of function macros, such as
27659 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
27663 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
27671 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
27678 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
27679 avoid confusions, because
27680 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
27684 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
27690 \begin_layout Standard
27691 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
27693 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
27697 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
27703 \begin_layout Standard
27704 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
27705 are placed, as described in section
27706 \begin_inset space ~
27710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27712 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27719 \begin_layout Subsection
27721 \begin_inset Index idx
27724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27733 \begin_layout Standard
27734 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27736 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27737 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27738 commands, for example, to enter
27739 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27742 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27743 Our example is entered by typing
27748 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27755 \begin_inset space ~
27759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27761 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27765 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27768 \begin_layout Standard
27769 \begin_inset Float table
27776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27777 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27782 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27786 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27796 \begin_inset Tabular
27797 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27798 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27799 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27800 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27801 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27885 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27939 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27993 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
28003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28047 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
28057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28101 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
28111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28155 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
28165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28209 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
28219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28263 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
28273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28317 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
28327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28362 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
28383 \begin_layout Standard
28384 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
28387 \begin_inset space ~
28395 arg "math-insert \\hat"
28398 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
28402 \begin_layout Section
28403 Brackets and Delimiters
28404 \begin_inset Index idx
28407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28414 \begin_inset Index idx
28417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28426 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28433 \begin_layout Standard
28434 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
28436 For some purposes, using just the keys
28441 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
28442 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
28443 toolbar delimiter icon
28446 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28450 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
28451 \begin_inset Formula
28453 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
28461 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
28462 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
28466 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28469 and the expression on the right was entered using the
28475 \begin_inset Formula
28477 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
28485 \begin_layout Standard
28486 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
28487 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
28491 \begin_layout Standard
28492 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
28493 left side and right side.
28494 If you use the option
28497 \begin_inset space ~
28502 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
28503 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
28505 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
28510 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
28511 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
28514 \begin_layout Standard
28515 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
28516 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
28517 is to go inside the brackets.
28518 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
28523 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
28524 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
28525 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
28529 arg "math-delim ( )"
28535 \begin_layout Section
28536 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
28537 \begin_inset Index idx
28540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28547 \begin_inset Index idx
28550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28557 \begin_inset Index idx
28560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28561 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28569 \begin_layout Standard
28570 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28574 \begin_inset space ~
28582 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
28586 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
28587 Here is an example:
28588 \begin_inset Formula
28590 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
28599 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
28600 \begin_inset space ~
28604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28606 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28611 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
28612 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
28613 This alignment is set in the box
28618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28667 for every column as default.
28668 For example, the sequence
28669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28680 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
28681 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
28682 corresponds to the relevant column.
28683 The result will look like this:
28684 \begin_inset Formula
28687 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
28688 column & has & has\,right\\
28689 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
28698 \begin_layout Standard
28699 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
28702 arg "newline-insert newline"
28705 while the cursor is in the matrix.
28706 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
28708 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28711 or the math toolbar.
28714 \begin_layout Standard
28715 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
28716 It can be created with the menu
28718 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28719 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28721 \begin_inset space ~
28733 Here is an example:
28734 \begin_inset Formula
28748 \begin_layout Standard
28749 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28752 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28755 arg "newline-insert newline"
28759 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28764 arg "newline-insert newline"
28767 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28775 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28776 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28777 A new row is created by every further entry of
28780 arg "newline-insert newline"
28784 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28785 Here is an example:
28786 \begin_inset Formula
28788 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28789 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28794 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28795 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28796 \begin_inset Formula
28798 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28806 \begin_layout Standard
28807 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28814 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28815 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28818 reference "eq:asquared"
28823 The other types are described in section
28824 \begin_inset space ~
28828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28830 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28837 \begin_layout Section
28838 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28839 \begin_inset Index idx
28842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28843 Math ! Formula numbering
28849 \begin_inset Index idx
28852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28853 Math ! Referencing formulas
28859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28861 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28868 \begin_layout Standard
28869 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28871 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28872 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28874 \begin_inset space ~
28878 \begin_inset space ~
28886 arg "math-number-toggle"
28890 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28891 within parentheses.
28892 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28893 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28894 the document class.
28895 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28896 separated by a dot:
28897 \begin_inset Formula
28907 arg "math-number-toggle"
28910 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28911 You can only number displayed formulas.
28914 \begin_layout Standard
28915 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28917 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28918 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28920 \begin_inset space ~
28924 \begin_inset space ~
28932 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28935 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28936 \begin_inset Formula
28939 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28945 To number all lines use the shortcut
28948 arg "math-number-toggle"
28954 \begin_layout Standard
28955 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28958 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28959 A label is inserted with the menu
28961 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28970 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28971 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28972 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28984 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28985 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28986 We inserted in the following example the label
28987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28994 in the second line:
28995 \begin_inset Formula
28997 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28998 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
29003 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
29004 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
29005 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
29007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29009 \begin_inset space ~
29017 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29021 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
29022 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29023 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
29024 as the formula number:
29027 \begin_layout Standard
29028 This is a cross-reference to equation (
29029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29031 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29038 \begin_layout Standard
29039 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
29040 's cross-reference box are described in section
29041 \begin_inset space ~
29045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29047 reference "sec:Cross-References"
29052 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
29060 \begin_layout Section
29061 User defined math macros
29062 \begin_inset Index idx
29065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29074 \begin_layout Standard
29076 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
29077 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
29078 Math macros are explained in section
29081 \begin_inset space ~
29093 \begin_layout Section
29097 \begin_layout Subsection
29099 \begin_inset Index idx
29102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29111 \begin_layout Standard
29112 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
29113 To set a font in a formula, use the
29116 \begin_inset space ~
29124 arg "math-insert \\font"
29127 , or enter its command, listed in table
29128 \begin_inset space ~
29132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29134 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
29141 \begin_layout Standard
29142 \begin_inset Float table
29149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29150 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29155 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
29159 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
29167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29169 \begin_inset Tabular
29170 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
29171 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
29172 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29173 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29205 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
29213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29232 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
29240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29259 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
29267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29292 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
29300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29319 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
29327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29341 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
29342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29347 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29348 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
29356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29361 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29377 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
29385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29411 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
29419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29433 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
29434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29439 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29447 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
29455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29460 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29476 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
29484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29510 \begin_layout Standard
29511 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29519 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
29522 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
29524 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
29528 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
29547 \begin_layout Standard
29548 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
29549 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
29554 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
29555 space when you need a space in the box.
29556 Here is an example where
29557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29568 denotes the set of numbers:
29569 \begin_inset Formula
29571 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
29579 \begin_layout Standard
29580 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
29581 You can, for example, put a character in
29590 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
29594 \begin_inset Newline newline
29597 So it is better not to use this feature.
29600 \begin_layout Standard
29601 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
29602 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
29606 \begin_inset Newline newline
29609 You can only print them emboldened using the command
29615 , which works like the other typeface commands:
29616 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
29622 \begin_layout Standard
29629 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
29632 \begin_layout Standard
29633 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
29635 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29636 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29638 \begin_inset space ~
29646 \begin_layout Subsection
29648 \begin_inset Index idx
29651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29660 \begin_layout Standard
29661 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
29663 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
29667 \begin_inset space ~
29671 \begin_inset space ~
29679 \begin_inset space ~
29687 arg "math-insert \\font"
29691 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29692 in black instead of blue.
29693 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
29694 Here is an example:
29695 \begin_inset Formula
29698 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
29699 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
29708 \begin_layout Subsection
29710 \begin_inset Index idx
29713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29722 \begin_layout Standard
29723 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29724 automatically chosen in most situations.
29742 For most characters,
29750 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29751 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29756 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29757 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29758 thinks are appropriate.
29759 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29762 arg "math-insert \\style"
29766 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29767 For example, you can set
29768 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29771 , which is normally in
29780 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29784 The four styles are used in the following example:
29787 \begin_layout Standard
29788 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29792 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29796 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29800 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29806 \begin_layout Standard
29807 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29808 is set in a particular size with the menu
29810 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29812 \begin_inset space ~
29817 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29818 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29819 will be adjusted to correspond.
29820 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29831 \begin_layout Standard
29835 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29841 \begin_layout Section
29842 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29844 \begin_inset Index idx
29847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29854 \begin_inset Index idx
29857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29866 \begin_layout Standard
29868 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29869 that are in common use.
29872 \begin_layout Subsection
29873 Enabling AMS-Support
29876 \begin_layout Standard
29877 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29879 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
29895 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
29896 selecting the checkbox
29899 \begin_inset space ~
29903 \begin_inset space ~
29907 \begin_inset space ~
29916 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29920 \begin_inset Index idx
29923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29924 Document ! Settings
29932 \begin_inset space ~
29938 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29939 -errors in formulas,
29940 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29943 \begin_layout Subsection
29945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29947 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29952 \begin_inset Index idx
29955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29956 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29964 \begin_layout Standard
29965 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29966 provides a selection of different formula types.
29968 allows you to choose between
29989 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29990 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29997 , for an explanation of these formula types.
30000 \begin_layout Chapter
30004 \begin_layout Section
30006 \begin_inset Index idx
30009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30018 name "sec:Cross-References"
30025 \begin_layout Standard
30026 One of \SpecialChar LyX
30027 's strengths is cross-references.
30028 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
30030 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
30031 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
30032 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
30035 \begin_layout Enumerate
30039 \begin_layout Enumerate
30040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30042 name "enu:Second-item"
30049 \begin_layout Enumerate
30053 \begin_layout Standard
30054 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
30056 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30059 or by pressing the toolbar button
30066 A gray label box like this:
30067 \begin_inset Graphics
30068 filename clipart/label.png
30072 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
30074 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
30076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30109 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
30110 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
30112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30126 \begin_layout Standard
30127 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
30129 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30132 or the toolbar button
30135 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
30139 A gray cross-reference box like this:
30140 \begin_inset Graphics
30141 filename clipart/reference.png
30145 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
30147 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
30148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30160 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
30164 \begin_layout Standard
30165 As an alternative to
30167 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30170 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
30175 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
30176 to the actual cursor position via the menu
30178 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30190 \begin_layout Standard
30191 Here is our cross-reference: Item
30192 \begin_inset space ~
30196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30198 reference "enu:Second-item"
30205 \begin_layout Standard
30206 It is recommended to use a protected space
30210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30211 described in section
30212 \begin_inset space ~
30216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30218 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
30227 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
30228 line breaks between them.
30231 \begin_layout Standard
30232 There are eight formats of cross-references:
30235 \begin_layout Description
30236 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
30237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30239 reference "fig:Two-images"
30246 \begin_layout Description
30247 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
30248 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
30250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30260 reference "eq:tanhExp"
30267 \begin_layout Description
30268 <page>: prints the page number: Page
30269 \begin_inset space ~
30273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30274 LatexCommand pageref
30275 reference "fig:Two-images"
30282 \begin_layout Description
30284 \begin_inset space ~
30288 \begin_inset space ~
30291 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
30292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30293 LatexCommand vpageref
30294 reference "fig:Two-images"
30299 \begin_inset Newline newline
30302 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
30303 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
30304 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
30305 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
30306 it prints “on the next page”.
30307 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
30310 \begin_layout Description
30312 \begin_inset space ~
30316 \begin_inset space ~
30320 \begin_inset space ~
30323 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
30324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30326 reference "fig:Two-images"
30331 \begin_inset Newline newline
30334 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
30340 ; otherwise it behaves like
30344 \begin_inset space ~
30348 \begin_inset space ~
30357 \begin_layout Description
30359 \begin_inset space ~
30362 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
30363 \begin_inset Newline newline
30367 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30375 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30385 \begin_inset Index idx
30388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30390 packages ! prettyref
30396 \begin_inset Index idx
30399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30401 packages ! refstyle
30412 \begin_inset Newline newline
30415 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
30416 -package should be used for this feature by setting
30419 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
30423 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30424 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30432 is the default and preferred because
30436 supports only English documents.
30437 The format is specified by using the command
30441 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30450 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30451 preamble of the document.
30452 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
30454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30470 \begin_inset Newline newline
30477 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
30482 \begin_inset Newline newline
30493 predefines reference formats for all available types.
30494 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
30496 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
30497 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
30502 , you might do so as follows:
30503 \begin_inset Newline newline
30510 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30511 format{prop}{Proposition
30516 \begin_inset Newline newline
30519 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
30520 the package documentation
30521 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30523 key "prettyref,refstyle"
30529 \begin_inset Newline newline
30540 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
30547 \begin_layout Description
30549 \begin_inset space ~
30552 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
30553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30554 LatexCommand nameref
30555 reference "fig:Two-images"
30562 \begin_layout Description
30564 \begin_inset space ~
30567 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30568 label for the reference:
30569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30570 LatexCommand labelonly
30571 reference "fig:Two-images"
30576 \begin_inset Newline newline
30579 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
30580 Code, if you want to issue a command
30581 that \SpecialChar LyX
30587 , then you may want to use the
30590 \begin_inset space ~
30595 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
30597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30605 This is the form needed for e.
30606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30610 \begin_inset space \space{}
30617 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
30618 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30620 The varieties are adjusted in the field
30624 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
30628 \begin_layout Standard
30629 You can only use the style
30633 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
30637 is always possible.
30640 \begin_layout Standard
30641 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
30642 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
30644 Referencing formulas is explained in section
30645 \begin_inset space ~
30649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30651 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
30658 \begin_layout Standard
30659 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
30663 \begin_inset space ~
30667 \begin_inset space ~
30672 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
30673 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
30674 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
30677 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
30680 \begin_inset space ~
30685 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
30686 You can also go back with the toolbar button
30689 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
30693 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
30694 or, using the menu:
30696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
30697 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
30705 \begin_layout Standard
30706 You can change labels at any time.
30707 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
30709 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
30711 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
30712 change them all manually
30717 \begin_layout Standard
30718 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
30720 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
30724 \begin_layout Standard
30725 References are described in detail in the section
30736 \begin_layout Section
30737 Table of Contents and other Listings
30738 \begin_inset Index idx
30741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30748 \begin_inset Index idx
30751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30752 Navigating ! Outline
30758 \begin_inset Index idx
30761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30777 \begin_layout Subsection
30779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30781 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30788 \begin_layout Standard
30789 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30792 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30794 \begin_inset space ~
30798 \begin_inset space ~
30804 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30806 If you click on it, the
30810 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30811 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30812 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30814 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30816 \begin_inset space ~
30821 that is described in section
30822 \begin_inset space ~
30826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30828 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30835 \begin_layout Standard
30836 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30837 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30839 \begin_inset space ~
30843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30845 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30849 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30851 \begin_inset space ~
30855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30857 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30861 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30863 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30866 \begin_layout Subsection
30867 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30870 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30877 \begin_layout Standard
30878 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30880 You can insert them via the
30882 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30883 List/Contents/References
30886 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30889 \begin_layout Section
30890 URLs and Hyperlinks
30891 \begin_inset Index idx
30894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30901 \begin_inset Index idx
30904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30913 \begin_layout Subsection
30915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30924 \begin_layout Standard
30925 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30927 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30933 \begin_layout Standard
30934 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30936 \begin_inset Flex URL
30939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30941 https://www.lyx.org
30949 \begin_layout Standard
30950 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30956 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30960 \begin_layout Standard
30961 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30969 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30978 \begin_layout Subsection
30980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30982 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30989 \begin_layout Standard
30990 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30992 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30995 or with the toolbar button
31002 The appearing dialog has two fields:
31011 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
31012 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
31013 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31015 name "LyX's homepage"
31016 target "https://www.lyx.org"
31021 , an Email address like this:
31022 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31024 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
31025 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
31031 , or a link to a file.
31036 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31044 \begin_layout Standard
31045 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
31047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31058 to the link target.
31061 \begin_layout Standard
31062 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
31063 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
31064 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
31065 the text style dialog.
31066 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
31070 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31072 name "LyX's homepage"
31073 target "https://www.lyx.org"
31081 \begin_layout Standard
31082 The link text color can be changed, when the option
31086 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
31088 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31089 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31093 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
31095 \begin_inset Newline newline
31103 \begin_inset Newline newline
31110 in the PDF Properties dialog.
31111 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
31115 \begin_layout Section
31117 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
31119 \begin_inset Index idx
31122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31131 name "sec:Counters"
31138 \begin_layout Standard
31140 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31141 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31142 is its ability to manage counters.
31143 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
31144 modify counters directly.
31145 This can be done in
31146 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500277
31148 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500277
31151 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31152 using the counter inset, which is accessible from the Edit menu.
31153 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero);
31157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31159 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
31160 Note that the section counter, e.g., starts with its value at zero and then
31161 is incremented to one when the first section is created.
31162 So, if you want the next section to be section five, say, then you need
31163 to set the section counter to four.
31170 to add to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be
31171 negative); to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
31172 These effects can also be limited to
31173 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500332
31175 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500332
31178 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31180 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in
31181 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500350
31183 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500350
31186 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31190 \begin_layout Standard
31192 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
31193 There are five commands you can use:
31196 \begin_layout Enumerate
31198 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
31203 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
31206 \begin_layout Enumerate
31208 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
31213 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract, if
31214 you choose a negative number)
31217 \begin_layout Enumerate
31219 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
31224 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
31227 \begin_layout Enumerate
31229 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
31232 Save value of counter:
31234 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
31237 \begin_layout Enumerate
31239 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
31242 Restore value of counter:
31244 Restores the previously saved value.
31247 \begin_layout Standard
31249 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
31250 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
31251 those that are available in the current document class.
31256 \begin_layout Section
31258 \begin_inset Index idx
31261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31270 name "sec:Appendices"
31277 \begin_layout Standard
31278 Appendices are created with the menu
31280 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31282 \begin_inset space ~
31286 \begin_inset space ~
31292 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
31293 as the appendix part of the book.
31294 This part is marked with a red borderline.
31297 \begin_layout Standard
31298 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
31299 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
31300 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
31301 and the subsection number.
31302 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
31306 \begin_layout Standard
31308 \begin_inset space ~
31312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31314 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
31322 \begin_inset space ~
31326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31328 reference "subsec:Export"
31335 \begin_layout Section
31337 \begin_inset Index idx
31340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31349 name "sec:Bibliography"
31356 \begin_layout Standard
31357 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
31359 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
31360 \begin_inset space ~
31364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31366 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31373 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
31378 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
31379 \begin_inset space ~
31383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31385 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
31390 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
31391 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
31392 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
31396 using a bibliography database.
31399 \begin_layout Standard
31400 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
31401 use two bibliographies in this document, a
31405 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
31406 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
31407 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
31408 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
31409 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
31412 \begin_layout Subsection
31413 The Bibliography Environment
31414 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31416 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31423 \begin_layout Standard
31428 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
31430 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
31439 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
31441 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
31442 of ASCII characters only.
31446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31448 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31451 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
31457 \begin_inset Newline newline
31461 \begin_inset Flex URL
31464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31466 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
31476 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31486 , a short form of its title, as the key.
31487 \begin_inset Newline newline
31494 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
31495 the number of the entry.
31500 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31509 \begin_layout Standard
31510 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
31512 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31515 or the toolbar button
31518 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
31522 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
31523 containing the available citations.
31524 Select one or more keys from the list and
31534 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
31535 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
31539 \begin_layout Standard
31540 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
31541 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
31542 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
31544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31554 \begin_layout Standard
31558 Companion Second Edition
31561 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31563 key "latexcompanion"
31571 \begin_layout Standard
31572 The \SpecialChar LyX
31573 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
31574 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31584 \begin_layout Standard
31585 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31592 \begin_inset Index idx
31595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31604 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
31605 the label needs to be given the form
31606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31617 Author A and Author B(Year)
31618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31625 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
31632 \begin_inset space ~
31637 in the document settings
31638 \begin_inset Index idx
31641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31642 Document ! Settings
31649 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
31651 \begin_inset space ~
31657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31659 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
31667 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
31669 Once you have done that, the
31672 \change_inserted 630872221 1621589258
31674 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
31677 dialog has three input fields instead of the
31694 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
31695 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
31696 These two are madatory.
31697 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
31700 Baker, Jones, and Williams
31702 ) and in abrreviated form (
31709 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
31710 add the abbreviated form to
31714 and the full list to the optional
31722 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
31723 If specified like this,
31725 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
31726 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
31729 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31736 is specified, toggling
31737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31744 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
31745 full and abbreviated list
31749 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
31750 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
31751 the citation references.
31752 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
31757 \begin_layout Standard
31758 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
31761 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31763 \begin_inset space ~
31771 arg "layout-paragraph"
31775 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
31778 \begin_layout Subsection
31779 Bibliography databases
31780 \begin_inset Index idx
31783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31784 Bibliography ! Databases
31790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31792 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31799 \begin_layout Standard
31800 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
31805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31806 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31808 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31809 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31814 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31816 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31817 your working field in a database.
31818 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31819 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31820 list for that document.
31821 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31825 \begin_layout Standard
31826 The database is a text file with the file extension
31827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31838 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31839 The format is explained in
31840 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31847 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31849 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31851 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31857 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31858 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31859 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31861 \begin_inset Flex URL
31864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31866 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31874 \begin_layout Standard
31876 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31877 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31878 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31880 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31882 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31883 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31884 Those are addressed by
31889 \begin_inset Index idx
31892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31894 packages ! biblatex
31900 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31901 (although it has been significantly
31902 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31912 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31913 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31914 might conversely fail to correctly
31915 handle databases that use specific
31924 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31928 \begin_layout Standard
31929 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31934 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31940 \begin_inset Index idx
31943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31944 Document ! Settings
31956 \begin_inset space ~
31961 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31969 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31970 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31972 \begin_inset Index idx
31975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31976 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31985 \begin_layout Standard
31986 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31989 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31990 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31992 \begin_inset space ~
31998 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31999 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32007 Add bibliography to TOC
32009 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
32014 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
32015 in the document or just the cited references.
32017 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
32022 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
32023 differ from the encoding of the document.
32028 \begin_layout Standard
32029 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32030 style file is a text file with the file extension
32031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32042 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
32043 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32044 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
32045 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
32047 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
32052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32053 For information on how this is done, have a look at
32054 \begin_inset Newline newline
32058 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32060 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
32070 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32075 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
32079 \begin_layout Standard
32080 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
32083 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32085 \begin_inset Index idx
32088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32089 Bibliography ! Biblatex
32095 \begin_inset Index idx
32098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32100 packages ! biblatex
32108 \begin_layout Standard
32109 Accessing a database via
32113 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32115 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599883
32117 \change_inserted 630872221 1621599883
32122 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32123 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32125 \begin_inset space ~
32131 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32132 you cannot select a
32137 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
32141 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32144 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
32145 As for the styles, note the following.
32150 \begin_layout Standard
32155 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
32157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32168 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
32169 file (text file with the file extension
32170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32181 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
32182 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
32184 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
32188 \begin_layout Standard
32193 styles are not set in the
32196 \begin_inset space ~
32201 dialog, but in the document settings.
32202 \begin_inset Index idx
32205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32206 Document ! Settings
32211 However, in the dialog in the
32215 field, which is only visible if you use
32219 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
32220 example how its heading will appear).
32221 These options are described in detail in the
32226 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32236 \begin_layout Standard
32237 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
32238 \begin_inset space ~
32242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32244 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32254 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32255 Bibliography Processors
32258 \begin_layout Standard
32259 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
32260 uses a bibliography processor,
32261 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
32262 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
32263 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32265 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
32266 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
32269 \begin_layout Standard
32270 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
32272 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
32273 You can do this on a general level in
32275 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32276 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32277 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32280 or for individual documents in
32282 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32283 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32287 The following variants are available by default:
32290 \begin_layout Description
32291 biber a specific, modern processor
32292 \begin_inset Index idx
32295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32302 developed exclusively for
32306 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32312 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
32317 makes use of; if you use the
32321 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
32328 \begin_layout Description
32329 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
32330 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
32331 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
32335 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
32338 \begin_layout Description
32339 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
32340 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
32344 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
32348 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
32352 features are supported.
32355 \begin_layout Standard
32356 By default (with the
32362 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32363 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32376 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32377 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32378 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32381 ), \SpecialChar LyX
32382 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
32395 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32396 -based bibliography styles).
32397 This should suit most needs.
32400 \begin_layout Standard
32401 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
32402 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
32403 (in \SpecialChar LyX
32408 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32409 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
32410 You can adjust it in
32412 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32413 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32414 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32420 \begin_layout Standard
32421 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
32422 can add below the selection.
32423 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
32424 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32430 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32440 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32444 \begin_layout Standard
32446 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
32448 These are explained in detail in section
32450 Customizing Bibliographies
32454 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32459 Additional Features
32462 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599958
32466 \begin_layout Subsection
32468 \begin_inset Index idx
32471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32472 Bibliography ! Citation format
32478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32480 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
32487 \begin_layout Standard
32488 Many different citation formats are common, e.
32489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32493 \begin_inset space \space{}
32496 numerical citation (as
32497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32504 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
32505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32512 ) or author-year citations (as
32513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32522 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
32526 \begin_layout Standard
32527 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
32530 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32531 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32535 \begin_inset Index idx
32538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32539 Document ! Settings
32544 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
32550 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
32551 labels, is there to use
32554 \begin_inset space ~
32565 \begin_inset space ~
32570 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
32571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32573 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32580 \begin_layout Standard
32581 With a bibliography database (see
32582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32584 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32591 ) one has in contrary to the
32595 environment full access to the formatting styles.
32596 These style formats are available:
32599 \begin_layout Description
32601 \begin_inset space ~
32604 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32605 -based approached without any additional packages
32606 (simple numeric citations).
32609 \begin_layout Description
32610 Biblatex loads the package
32615 \begin_inset Index idx
32618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32620 packages ! biblatex
32625 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
32627 Biblatex citation style
32631 Biblatex bibliography style
32634 Options to the package
32638 can be entered in the
32645 \begin_layout Description
32647 \begin_inset space ~
32651 \begin_inset space ~
32654 mode) loads the package
32658 with the natbib compatibility mode.
32659 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
32671 behavior very closely.
32676 this option has some additional styles.
32681 styles are also supported by this variant.
32684 \begin_layout Description
32686 \begin_inset space ~
32689 (BibTeX) loads the package
32694 \begin_inset Index idx
32697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32704 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
32707 \begin_layout Description
32709 \begin_inset space ~
32712 (BibTeX) loads the package
32717 \begin_inset Index idx
32720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32727 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
32730 \begin_layout Standard
32739 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
32741 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
32750 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
32752 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
32753 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
32755 Biblatex citation style
32758 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
32764 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
32768 \begin_layout Standard
32769 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
32770 are available in the
32775 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
32776 a name prefix such as
32777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32792 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32797 \begin_inset space \space{}
32801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32812 \begin_layout Standard
32813 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32819 \begin_inset space \space{}
32822 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32828 \begin_inset space \space{}
32832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32844 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32848 \begin_inset space ~
32856 \begin_inset space ~
32862 Here is a simple example where the text
32863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32867 \begin_inset space ~
32871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32874 appears after the reference:
32877 \begin_layout Quote
32879 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32882 key "latexcompanion"
32890 \begin_layout Standard
32891 All styles except for
32895 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32905 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32909 \begin_layout Standard
32910 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32911 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32912 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32917 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32918 multi-citation (so-called
32919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32922 qualified citation lists
32923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32929 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32934 dialog will display three columns in the field
32941 \begin_inset space ~
32949 \begin_inset space ~
32957 \begin_inset space ~
32963 If you double-click on an item's
32966 \begin_inset space ~
32974 \begin_inset space ~
32979 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32982 General text before
32988 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32991 \begin_layout Subsection
32993 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
32994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32996 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
33000 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
33004 \begin_layout Standard
33006 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
33008 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
33011 \begin_inset space ~
33015 \begin_inset space ~
33019 \begin_inset space ~
33023 \begin_inset space ~
33026 Content\SpecialChar ldots
33029 context menu if specific conditions are met:
33032 \begin_layout Itemize
33034 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
33035 If citation entries include any of the fields
33036 \begin_inset Flex Code
33039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33041 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33050 \begin_inset Flex Code
33053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33055 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33063 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
33064 \begin_inset Flex Code
33067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33069 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33077 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
33078 \begin_inset Flex Code
33081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33083 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33091 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
33094 \begin_layout Itemize
33096 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
33097 If citation entries include any of the fields
33098 \begin_inset Flex Code
33101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33103 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33111 (filled by JabRef) or
33112 \begin_inset Flex Code
33115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33117 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33125 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
33126 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
33127 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
33130 \begin_layout Standard
33132 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
33133 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
33134 also searches your disk for matching files if you
33137 Search drive for cited files
33141 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33142 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
33143 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33144 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33148 It uses the tokens supplied at
33152 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
33153 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the
33154 \change_deleted 630872221 1621608311
33156 \change_inserted 630872221 1621608312
33158 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
33159 of the file (at arbitrary position).
33161 opens the first matching file it finds.
33162 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
33163 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
33164 the chance this works for you.
33169 \begin_layout Standard
33171 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
33172 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
33173 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33175 \begin_inset Flex Code
33178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33180 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
33189 \begin_inset Flex Code
33192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33194 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
33202 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the
33204 Customization manual
33209 Cite format description
33216 \begin_layout Section
33218 \begin_inset Index idx
33221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33237 \begin_layout Standard
33238 An index entry is created if you use the menu
33240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33242 \begin_inset space ~
33247 or the toolbar button
33254 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
33255 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
33256 by \SpecialChar LyX
33257 as the index entry.
33260 \begin_layout Standard
33261 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
33263 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33264 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33266 \begin_inset space ~
33272 A light blue box labeled
33273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33284 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
33285 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
33289 \begin_layout Standard
33290 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
33291 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33292 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
33293 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33295 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33297 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
33305 \begin_layout Subsection
33306 Grouping Index Entries
33307 \begin_inset Index idx
33310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33319 \begin_layout Standard
33320 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
33322 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
33323 lists under the entry
33324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33332 First we create the entry
33333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33341 \begin_inset space ~
33345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33347 reference "subsec:Lists"
33352 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
33353 \begin_inset space ~
33357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33359 reference "sec:Itemize"
33363 , we insert the command
33366 \begin_layout Standard
33372 \begin_layout Standard
33376 \begin_layout Standard
33382 \begin_layout Standard
33383 for the enumerated list in section
33384 \begin_inset space ~
33388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33390 reference "sec:Enumerate"
33397 \begin_layout Standard
33398 The exclamation mark
33399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33406 marks the grouping levels.
33407 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
33408 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
33409 If we don't have an index entry for
33410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33417 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
33420 \begin_layout Subsection
33422 \begin_inset Index idx
33425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33426 Index ! Page ranges
33434 \begin_layout Standard
33435 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
33437 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
33438 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
33439 an index entry in section
33440 \begin_inset space ~
33444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33446 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
33453 \begin_layout Standard
33456 Paragraph environments|(
33459 \begin_layout Standard
33460 and another entry at the end of section
33461 \begin_inset space ~
33465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33467 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
33474 \begin_layout Standard
33477 Paragraph environments|)
33480 \begin_layout Standard
33482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33505 respectively start and end the index range.
33506 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
33507 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
33508 the pages of the indexed document parts.
33509 An example is the index entry
33510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33513 Document ! Settings
33514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33520 \begin_layout Subsection
33522 \begin_inset Index idx
33525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33526 Index ! Cross referencing
33534 \begin_layout Standard
33535 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
33536 We referred for example in the index entry
33537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33545 \begin_inset space ~
33549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33551 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
33555 ) to the index entry
33556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33563 in the same section using the entry
33566 \begin_layout Standard
33569 GIF|see{Image formats}
33572 \begin_layout Standard
33573 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33575 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
33576 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
33579 \begin_layout Subsection
33581 \begin_inset Index idx
33584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33585 Index ! Entry order
33593 \begin_layout Standard
33594 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
33595 follow the rules for the index order.
33596 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
33601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33602 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
33604 \begin_inset space ~
33608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33610 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33619 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
33620 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
33621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33645 \begin_inset Index idx
33648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33649 Dummy entries ! maïs
33655 \begin_inset Index idx
33658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33659 Dummy entries ! maître
33665 \begin_inset Index idx
33668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33669 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
33674 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
33675 maïs, maison, maître.
33676 To achieve this, we use the command
33679 \begin_layout Standard
33682 previous entry@current entry
33685 \begin_layout Standard
33686 In our case we want to have
33687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33702 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
33705 \begin_layout Standard
33711 \begin_layout Standard
33712 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
33713 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
33715 See the next subsection for an example.
33718 \begin_layout Subsection
33720 \begin_inset Index idx
33723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33724 Index ! Entry layout
33732 \begin_layout Standard
33733 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
33734 \begin_inset Index idx
33737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33740 This is an italic dummy entry
33745 You can also format the page number using the character
33746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33753 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33754 -command without a backslash.
33755 We can write for example
33758 \begin_layout Standard
33761 italic page number:|textit
33764 \begin_layout Standard
33765 to get the page number in italic.
33766 \begin_inset Index idx
33769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33770 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
33775 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
33776 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
33778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33794 \begin_inset space ~
33800 Have a look at section
33801 \begin_inset space ~
33805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33807 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33811 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33815 \begin_layout Standard
33816 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33824 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
33828 to generate the index, see section
33829 \begin_inset space ~
33833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33835 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33844 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33849 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
33850 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33853 key "latexcompanion"
33866 \begin_layout Standard
33867 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33869 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33870 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33871 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33872 If so, put the following in the preamble
33875 \begin_layout Standard
33887 \begin_layout Standard
33891 \begin_layout Standard
33897 \begin_layout Standard
33898 in the index entry.
33899 \begin_inset Index idx
33902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33903 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33908 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33909 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33910 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33913 \begin_layout Standard
33914 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33915 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33916 a bold font for all index entries.
33917 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33929 documentation for details,
33930 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33932 key "makeindex,xindy"
33940 \begin_layout Subsection
33942 \begin_inset Index idx
33945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33954 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33961 \begin_layout Standard
33962 If the index generation program
33966 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33967 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33971 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33972 distribution, is used.
33976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33981 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33982 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33983 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33984 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33985 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33995 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33997 dialog, see section
33998 \begin_inset space ~
34002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34004 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34009 The available options are listed and explained in
34010 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34012 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
34018 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
34022 \begin_layout Standard
34023 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
34024 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
34027 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34028 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34032 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
34033 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
34036 \begin_layout Subsection
34040 \begin_layout Standard
34041 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
34042 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
34043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34050 next to the standard index.
34052 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
34053 that add this feature.
34060 \begin_inset Index idx
34063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34065 packages ! splitidx
34070 package to generate multiple indexes.
34071 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
34076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34077 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
34079 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34087 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34088 style, but it also includes
34089 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
34090 Please consult the package's manual for details.
34098 \begin_layout Standard
34099 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
34100 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
34102 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34103 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34106 and select the option
34108 Use multiple Indexes
34115 already contains the standard index
34116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34124 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
34125 also appear as a heading) to the
34129 input field and press the
34134 The new index now also appears in the list.
34135 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
34136 label color to the new index.
34139 \begin_layout Standard
34140 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
34143 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34144 List/Contents/References
34150 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
34151 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
34152 are additional features:
34155 \begin_layout Itemize
34156 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
34157 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
34160 \begin_layout Itemize
34161 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
34162 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
34167 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
34168 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
34169 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
34170 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
34173 \begin_layout Itemize
34178 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
34179 code in the name of the index.
34182 \begin_layout Section
34183 Nomenclature/Glossary
34184 \begin_inset Index idx
34187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34194 \begin_inset Index idx
34197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34228 name "sec:Nomenclature"
34235 \begin_layout Standard
34236 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
34237 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
34238 called nomenclature or glossary.
34241 \begin_layout Standard
34242 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34249 \begin_inset Index idx
34252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34260 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34262 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34269 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34273 \begin_layout Standard
34274 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
34275 and then use the menu
34277 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34283 \begin_inset space ~
34288 or the toolbar button
34291 arg "nomencl-insert"
34296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34307 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
34310 \begin_layout Standard
34311 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
34312 The first is the term or
34316 that you wish to define.
34321 of the term or symbol.
34324 \begin_layout Standard
34325 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34333 To use \SpecialChar TeX
34334 code for nomenclature entries the option
34338 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
34346 \begin_layout Subsection
34347 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
34348 \begin_inset Index idx
34351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34352 Nomenclature ! Layout
34360 \begin_layout Standard
34361 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
34365 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
34368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34372 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34380 \begin_inset Newline newline
34388 \begin_inset Newline newline
34394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34401 character starts/ends the formula.
34402 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34403 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
34405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34415 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
34425 \begin_layout Standard
34426 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34427 syntax is given in section
34428 \begin_inset space ~
34432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34434 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34441 \begin_layout Standard
34445 \begin_inset space ~
34450 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
34452 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
34453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34457 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34464 in this document is:
34465 \begin_inset Newline newline
34470 dummy entry for the character
34475 \begin_inset Newline newline
34487 \begin_inset space ~
34497 font use the command
34526 \begin_layout Standard
34527 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
34528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34532 \begin_inset space \space{}
34536 \begin_inset Newline newline
34552 \begin_inset Newline newline
34555 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
34556 This command will make the font of all symbols
34563 \begin_inset space ~
34571 \begin_layout Standard
34572 If the characters |
34573 \begin_inset space \space{}
34577 \begin_inset space \space{}
34581 \begin_inset space \space{}
34585 \begin_inset space \space{}
34589 \begin_inset space \space{}
34592 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
34593 code they need to be escaped
34595 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
34597 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
34600 character in front of them.
34601 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
34603 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34604 LatexCommand nomenclature
34605 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
34606 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
34612 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
34614 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34615 LatexCommand nomenclature
34616 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
34617 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
34627 \begin_layout Subsection
34628 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
34629 \begin_inset Index idx
34632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34633 Nomenclature ! Sort order
34641 \begin_layout Standard
34642 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34643 -code of the symbol
34645 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
34647 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
34650 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34651 LatexCommand nomenclature
34653 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
34661 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34665 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34666 LatexCommand nomenclature
34669 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
34675 They will be sorted by
34676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34702 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34705 will be sorted before the
34709 since the character
34710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34717 is considered in sorting.
34720 \begin_layout Standard
34721 To control the sort order, you can edit the
34724 \begin_inset space ~
34729 field of the nomenclature dialog.
34730 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
34732 For the example given, you can insert
34736 in this field for the
34737 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34744 will be located before
34745 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34751 \begin_layout Standard
34752 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
34757 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34767 \begin_layout Subsection
34768 Nomenclature Options
34769 \begin_inset Index idx
34772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34773 Nomenclature ! Options
34779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34781 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
34788 \begin_layout Standard
34793 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
34794 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
34797 \begin_layout Description
34798 refeq Appends the phrase
34799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34814 to every nomenclature entry, where
34820 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
34823 \begin_layout Description
34824 refpage Appends the phrase
34825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34840 to every nomenclature entry, where
34846 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
34849 \begin_layout Description
34850 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34853 \begin_layout Standard
34854 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
34855 class options list in the
34857 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34861 In this document the options
34868 \begin_layout Standard
34869 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34875 \begin_layout Standard
34876 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34877 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34882 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34885 \begin_layout Description
34895 \begin_layout Description
34898 nomrefpage Like the
34905 \begin_layout Description
34908 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34917 \begin_layout Description
34921 \begin_inset space ~
34927 \begin_inset space ~
34932 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34935 \begin_layout Standard
34937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34944 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34945 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34949 \begin_layout Standard
34958 \begin_inset Newline newline
34964 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34968 \begin_inset space ~
34980 unskip, see equation
34983 \begin_inset Newline newline
34990 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34991 \begin_inset Newline newline
34997 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35001 \begin_inset space ~
35018 \begin_layout Standard
35019 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
35022 \begin_inset space ~
35027 in the document settings under
35030 \begin_inset space ~
35038 \begin_layout Standard
35046 \begin_inset Newline newline
35050 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35054 \begin_inset space ~
35066 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
35068 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
35069 \begin_inset Newline newline
35076 pagedeclaration}[1]{
35077 \begin_inset Newline newline
35081 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35085 \begin_inset space ~
35097 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
35102 \begin_layout Subsection
35103 Printing the Nomenclature
35104 \begin_inset Index idx
35107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35108 Nomenclature ! Printing
35116 \begin_layout Standard
35117 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
35119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35120 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35136 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
35137 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
35138 You can choose between these settings:
35141 \begin_layout Description
35142 Default a space of 1
35143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35149 \begin_layout Description
35151 \begin_inset space ~
35155 \begin_inset space ~
35158 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
35161 \begin_layout Description
35162 Custom custom space
35165 \begin_layout Standard
35166 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
35167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35175 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
35183 For example, in order to change the name to
35187 , add the following line to the preamble:
35190 \begin_layout Standard
35203 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
35206 \begin_layout Standard
35207 When you are using another document language than English, replace
35208 \begin_inset Newline newline
35223 , where *** is the name of the language used.
35226 \begin_layout Subsection
35227 Nomenclature Program
35228 \begin_inset Index idx
35231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35232 Nomenclature ! Program
35238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35240 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
35247 \begin_layout Standard
35253 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
35254 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
35256 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
35261 by adding options, see section
35262 \begin_inset space ~
35266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35268 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
35273 The available options are listed and explained in
35274 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35276 key "nomencl,makeindex"
35284 \begin_layout Section
35286 \begin_inset Index idx
35289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35296 \begin_inset Index idx
35299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35300 Document ! Branches
35306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35308 name "sec:Branches"
35315 \begin_layout Standard
35316 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
35317 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
35318 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
35319 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
35322 \begin_layout Standard
35323 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
35324 allows you to put text into branches.
35325 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
35326 To create a branch, either select the menu
35328 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35329 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
35332 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
35334 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35341 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
35342 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
35343 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
35344 and whether the name of the branch should
35345 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
35346 (see below for an example).
35347 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
35348 to the name of the other) and to add
35349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35361 \begin_inset space ~
35364 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
35365 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
35368 \begin_layout Standard
35369 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
35370 These boxes are inserted via the menu
35372 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35375 where you can choose a branch.
35376 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
35380 \begin_layout Standard
35381 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
35382 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
35385 \begin_layout Standard
35386 \begin_inset Branch Question
35390 \begin_layout Standard
35395 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
35403 \begin_layout Standard
35404 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35408 \begin_layout Standard
35413 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
35421 \begin_layout Standard
35428 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35429 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35432 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
35433 Consider for example a file
35434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35441 which has the above branches.
35443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35450 is active, the PDF export file would be called
35451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35474 branch were inactive,
35475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35490 branch was active, likewise
35491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35506 branch was active, and
35507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35510 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
35511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35514 if both branches were active.
35515 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
35516 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35522 \begin_layout Standard
35524 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147989
35525 It is also possible to
35526 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147965
35530 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147967
35532 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147977
35535 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
35540 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284375
35541 (they are marked with ~ before the name)
35545 \change_deleted 244031559 1635284383
35547 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284385
35550 make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
35551 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
35555 \begin_inset space ~
35563 \begin_layout Standard
35564 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35568 \begin_layout Standard
35574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35581 branch is deactivated.
35587 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35593 \begin_layout Standard
35594 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
35595 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
35596 definitions for each branch.
35597 For example you can define for the question branch
35601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35602 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35603 -syntax, see section
35604 \begin_inset space ~
35608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35610 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35622 \begin_layout Standard
35632 \begin_layout Standard
35642 \begin_layout Standard
35643 and for the answer branch
35646 \begin_layout Standard
35656 \begin_layout Standard
35666 \begin_layout Standard
35667 \begin_inset Branch Question
35671 \begin_layout Standard
35675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35703 \begin_layout Standard
35704 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35708 \begin_layout Standard
35712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35740 \begin_layout Standard
35741 Now it is possible to use the
35745 question{\SpecialChar ldots
35752 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
35755 commands to obtain conditional output.
35756 Here is an example formula where only the
35763 \begin_inset Formula
35765 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
35773 \begin_layout Standard
35774 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
35782 \begin_layout Standard
35783 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
35785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35789 \begin_inset space \space{}
35792 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
35794 For this advanced usage, see the
35800 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35803 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148012
35807 \begin_layout Standard
35809 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
35810 In case one extensively needs syncing activation branch status with open/close
35811 status of all branch insets in the document we provide
35816 function, which can be bound to keyboard shortcut or added to user-defined
35817 context menu of branch inset.
35822 \begin_layout Section
35824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35826 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
35831 \begin_inset Index idx
35834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35843 \begin_layout Standard
35845 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655914
35850 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35851 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35855 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655917
35858 allows you to set up
35859 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651900
35861 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651929
35865 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651937
35867 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651944
35871 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655939
35875 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651948
35880 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651614
35882 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651616
35886 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651959
35888 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651961
35891 are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35893 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651813
35895 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651814
35903 \begin_inset Index idx
35906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35908 packages ! hyperref
35914 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653717
35915 which you need to enable by clicking
35917 Use Hyperref Support
35919 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by
35920 your document class or another package, the checkbox you need to click
35923 Customize Hyperref Options
35926 Among other things, hyperref
35927 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651887
35931 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653821
35933 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653851
35937 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653826
35941 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653859
35944 cross-references in the
35945 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653786
35949 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653751
35951 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653751
35955 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
35956 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653878
35959 table of contents entry or on a reference to
35960 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653918
35961 open a website or to
35963 move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
35965 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653971
35966 Furthermore, you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
35967 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
35972 \begin_layout Standard
35973 The header information in the dialog tab
35977 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
35978 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example,
35979 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656745
35982 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
35983 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
35987 \begin_inset space ~
35991 \begin_inset space ~
35997 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654039
36000 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654041
36003 tries to extract the header information from your document title and author
36008 \begin_inset space ~
36012 \begin_inset space ~
36016 \begin_inset space ~
36021 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
36024 \begin_layout Standard
36026 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654066
36028 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654066
36036 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654103
36037 you can customize the
36038 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654105
36040 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654109
36044 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654087
36046 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654087
36050 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654147
36051 , and you can specify
36054 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654275
36056 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654283
36057 will look and if links for
36059 bibliographical backreferences are created
36060 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654335
36066 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either
36067 sections, pages or slides on which these entries are being cited
36073 \begin_inset space ~
36077 \begin_inset space ~
36081 \begin_inset space ~
36086 option allows long links to be split;
36089 \begin_inset space ~
36093 \begin_inset space ~
36097 \begin_inset space ~
36105 \begin_inset space ~
36110 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
36113 \begin_inset space ~
36118 colors the different links.
36119 The default colors are:
36122 \begin_layout Labeling
36123 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
36128 for hyperlinks and URLs
36131 \begin_layout Labeling
36132 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
36140 \begin_layout Labeling
36141 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
36149 \begin_layout Standard
36150 but you can change these in the
36151 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651692
36153 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651692
36159 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656056
36161 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656056
36167 For example, in this document they were changed with the
36168 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651709
36172 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651730
36182 \begin_layout Quote
36185 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
36188 \begin_layout Standard
36190 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654422
36195 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
36196 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
36197 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
36202 \begin_layout Standard
36207 you can specify if PDF
36208 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654456
36210 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654456
36214 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654511
36215 (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader)
36217 should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for
36218 readers to navigate through the document.
36219 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
36222 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654607
36224 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654609
36228 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654594
36234 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654550
36236 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654551
36238 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654802
36241 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening
36250 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654838
36251 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
36252 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654687
36253 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
36254 when opening the PDF.
36258 \begin_inset space ~
36261 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
36262 \begin_inset space ~
36265 1 will only display the sections
36266 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654724
36267 (collapsing the rest)
36270 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656154
36274 \begin_layout Standard
36276 \change_inserted -712698321 1644657105
36281 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones
36282 described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref
36284 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36291 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
36292 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
36293 \begin_inset Flex Code
36296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36298 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656321
36308 , not via the package options.
36309 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
36310 If you need to use one of those options, you can set them by adding
36313 \begin_layout Quote
36315 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656496
36318 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option
36319 \change_deleted 274215730 1652836969
36321 \change_inserted 274215730 1652836970
36327 \begin_layout Standard
36329 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656431
36332 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36333 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36336 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
36341 \begin_layout Standard
36343 \change_inserted -712698321 1644744249
36348 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of
36349 the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
36351 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
36352 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions, input is
36354 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
36357 pdfversion=1.7, lang=de-DE
36360 At the point of writing this, the list of options is still rather small
36361 and not very well documented (look for a file called
36363 documentmetadata-support.pdf
36365 ), but it is expected that in the future, rather fundamental PDF properties
36366 (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF
36367 standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
36370 \begin_layout Standard
36372 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656978
36373 PDF properties are also used in this document.
36374 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
36380 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
36381 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36393 \begin_layout Section
36395 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36399 name "sec:TeX-Code"
36406 \begin_layout Subsection
36409 \begin_inset Index idx
36412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36422 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36429 \begin_layout Standard
36430 As \SpecialChar LyX
36431 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
36432 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
36433 commands and constructs,
36436 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
36437 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
36438 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
36439 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36440 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
36441 cannot support all packages and
36445 \begin_layout Standard
36446 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
36447 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
36448 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
36452 Code box is created by the menu
36454 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36456 \begin_inset space ~
36461 or by the toolbar button
36474 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
36482 \begin_layout Standard
36483 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
36485 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
36487 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
36491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36492 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
36497 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36504 , you can write the command part
36510 in a \SpecialChar TeX
36511 Code box before the word and the closing brace
36515 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
36516 Code box behind the word.
36517 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
36518 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
36522 \begin_layout Standard
36523 \begin_inset Graphics
36524 filename clipart/ERT.png
36532 \begin_layout Standard
36536 \begin_layout Standard
36537 This is a line with a
36541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36564 \begin_layout Standard
36565 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36573 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36574 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
36575 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
36576 know that the command is finished.
36584 \begin_layout Subsection
36585 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36587 \begin_inset Argument 1
36590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36591 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
36598 \begin_inset Index idx
36601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36611 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
36618 \begin_layout Standard
36619 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
36620 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36621 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
36622 uses in the background.
36623 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
36624 is based on commands, you can
36625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36633 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
36634 any time if you know the right commands.
36635 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
36636 is the end of the day.
36637 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
36638 all caption labels bold.
36639 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
36641 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
36645 \begin_layout Standard
36646 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
36648 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36650 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36653 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36663 \begin_layout Standard
36664 As result you find that the package
36669 \begin_inset Index idx
36672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36680 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
36682 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36685 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36689 \begin_inset space ~
36697 \begin_layout Standard
36702 usepackage[options]{package name}
36705 \begin_layout Standard
36706 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
36707 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
36708 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
36709 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
36712 \begin_layout Standard
36713 In your case the package name is
36718 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
36723 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
36724 So you add the command
36727 \begin_layout Standard
36732 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
36735 \begin_layout Standard
36736 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
36740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36741 For more commands provided by the
36745 package, have a look at its documentation,
36746 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36761 \begin_layout Standard
36762 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
36764 For example if you use a
36768 class, you don't need the package
36772 , you can instead write
36775 \begin_layout Standard
36780 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
36785 \begin_layout Standard
36786 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
36787 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
36788 documentation of the document class you want to use.
36795 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
36798 \begin_layout Standard
36799 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
36800 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
36802 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36803 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
36804 Code box as described in the previous
36808 \begin_layout Standard
36809 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
36810 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36813 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36815 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
36823 \begin_layout Standard
36824 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36830 \begin_layout Standard
36834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36844 \begin_inset Note Note
36847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36848 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
36856 \begin_layout Left Header
36857 \begin_inset Argument 1
36860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36880 \begin_inset Note Note
36883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36884 defines the header line as described below
36892 \begin_layout Center Header
36893 \begin_inset Argument 1
36896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36905 \begin_layout Right Header
36906 \begin_inset Argument 1
36909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36930 \begin_layout Left Footer
36931 \begin_inset Argument 1
36934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36955 \begin_layout Center Footer
36956 \begin_inset Argument 1
36959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36971 \begin_inset Newline newline
36975 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36981 \begin_layout Right Footer
36982 \begin_inset Argument 1
36985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37007 \begin_layout Section
37008 Customized Page Headers and Footers
37009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37011 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
37016 \begin_inset Index idx
37019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37020 Document ! Header/Footer line
37026 \begin_inset Index idx
37029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37038 \begin_layout Standard
37039 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
37043 \begin_inset space ~
37054 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37060 \begin_inset space ~
37066 As a second step add in the menu
37068 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37069 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37078 Custom Header/Footerlines
37081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37085 This module offers the following 6
37086 \begin_inset space ~
37092 \begin_layout Description
37094 \begin_inset space ~
37098 \begin_inset space ~
37102 \begin_inset space ~
37106 \begin_inset space ~
37110 \begin_inset space ~
37116 \begin_layout Description
37118 \begin_inset space ~
37122 \begin_inset space ~
37126 \begin_inset space ~
37130 \begin_inset space ~
37134 \begin_inset space ~
37140 \begin_layout Standard
37141 for the different positions in the header/footer.
37142 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
37145 \begin_layout Standard
37146 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
37147 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
37149 \begin_inset space ~
37153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37155 reference "fig:Page-layout"
37159 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
37162 \begin_layout Standard
37163 \begin_inset Float figure
37170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37173 \begin_inset Tabular
37174 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
37175 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
37176 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
37177 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
37178 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
37180 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
37192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37198 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37209 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37227 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37238 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
37241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37242 The normal text on the page goes here.
37243 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
37245 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
37246 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
37251 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37260 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37271 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37289 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37300 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
37312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37318 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37336 \begin_inset Caption Standard
37338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37341 name "fig:Page-layout"
37345 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
37358 \begin_layout Standard
37359 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37367 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
37371 \begin_inset space ~
37376 is set to “Default”.
37377 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
37386 \begin_layout Subsection
37390 \begin_layout Standard
37391 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
37392 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
37393 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
37394 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
37396 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
37398 Defining the footer line works similarly.
37401 \begin_layout Standard
37402 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
37403 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
37407 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37409 \begin_inset space ~
37417 \begin_layout Description
37420 thepage prints the current page number
37423 \begin_layout Description
37426 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
37429 \begin_layout Description
37432 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
37435 \begin_layout Description
37438 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
37439 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
37442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37446 \begin_inset Quotes prd
37449 because it usually goes in a left header.
37452 \begin_layout Description
37455 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
37456 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
37458 It is normally used in the right header.
37461 \begin_layout Subsection
37462 Default header/footer
37465 \begin_layout Standard
37466 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
37467 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
37468 footer has the page number.
37469 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
37470 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
37471 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
37474 \begin_inset space ~
37482 \begin_layout Subsection
37486 \begin_layout Standard
37487 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
37488 Some pages are different.
37489 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
37490 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
37491 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
37492 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
37493 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
37496 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37497 Header and footer decoration line
37500 \begin_layout Standard
37501 By default, you get a 0.4
37502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37505 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
37506 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
37518 in the following way:
37521 \begin_layout Standard
37528 headrulewidth}{thickness}
37531 \begin_layout Standard
37532 where thickness is a size in standard units like
37545 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
37546 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37552 \begin_layout Standard
37553 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
37555 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
37556 \begin_inset space ~
37560 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37570 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37571 Several header/footer lines
37574 \begin_layout Standard
37575 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
37576 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
37577 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
37579 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37594 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37595 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37597 \begin_inset space ~
37605 \begin_layout Standard
37612 headheight}{height}
37615 \begin_layout Standard
37620 is a size in standard units (e.
37621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37625 \begin_inset space \space{}
37633 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
37634 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
37635 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37636 logfile with the menu
37638 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37640 \begin_inset space ~
37648 \begin_inset space ~
37653 to see if you can find a warning about the package
37658 \begin_inset Index idx
37661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37663 packages ! fancyhdr
37669 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
37670 for your header/footer.
37673 \begin_layout Subsection
37677 \begin_layout Standard
37678 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
37679 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
37680 This example consists of the following definition:
37683 \begin_layout Description
37685 \begin_inset space ~
37694 , empty optional argument
37697 \begin_layout Description
37699 \begin_inset space ~
37702 Header empty, empty optional argument
37705 \begin_layout Description
37707 \begin_inset space ~
37716 in the optional argument
37719 \begin_layout Description
37721 \begin_inset space ~
37730 in the optional argument
37733 \begin_layout Description
37735 \begin_inset space ~
37748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37752 \begin_inset Newline newline
37756 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
37760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37763 in the optional argument
37766 \begin_layout Description
37768 \begin_inset space ~
37777 , empty optional argument
37780 \begin_layout Description
37783 headrulewidth set to 2
37784 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37790 \begin_layout Standard
37791 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
37792 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
37798 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37808 \begin_layout Standard
37809 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
37815 \begin_layout Standard
37819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37823 pagestyle{headings}
37829 \begin_inset Note Note
37832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37833 switches back to page style with the default headings
37841 \begin_layout Section
37842 Previewing Snippets of your Document
37843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37845 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37850 \begin_inset Index idx
37853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37860 \begin_inset Index idx
37863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37872 \begin_layout Standard
37874 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
37875 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
37876 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
37879 \begin_layout Subsection
37883 \begin_layout Standard
37884 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37890 \begin_inset Index idx
37893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37895 packages ! preview-latex
37900 (on some systems named simply
37905 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37907 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37914 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37916 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
37924 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
37925 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37926 -package are automatically
37927 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
37931 \begin_layout Subsection
37935 \begin_layout Standard
37936 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37937 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37939 activate the option
37942 \begin_inset space ~
37949 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37955 \begin_inset space ~
37959 \begin_inset space ~
37962 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
37969 \begin_inset space ~
37982 \begin_inset space ~
37987 is the multiplication factor for the size.
37990 \begin_layout Standard
37991 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37996 \begin_inset space ~
38004 \begin_inset space ~
38012 \begin_layout Standard
38013 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
38014 and when you finish
38018 \begin_layout Standard
38019 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38027 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
38028 generated by activating the option
38031 \begin_inset space ~
38037 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
38045 \begin_layout Subsection
38046 Selected document parts
38049 \begin_layout Standard
38050 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
38051 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
38052 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
38053 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38055 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
38057 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38061 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
38062 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
38063 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
38066 \begin_layout Standard
38067 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38074 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38086 is explained in section
38088 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
38093 \begin_inset space ~
38103 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
38104 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
38105 the final rotated boxes,
38106 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
38107 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
38109 Here is the result:
38112 \begin_layout Standard
38113 \begin_inset Preview
38115 \begin_layout Standard
38120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38124 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
38130 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
38140 height_special "totalheight"
38145 backgroundcolor "none"
38148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38173 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
38179 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
38186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38201 \begin_layout Standard
38202 Previewing works also for colors.
38203 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38222 is explained in section
38229 \begin_inset space ~
38242 \begin_layout Standard
38243 \begin_inset Preview
38245 \begin_layout Standard
38249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38268 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
38273 This is text within a colored, framed box.
38277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38292 \begin_layout Standard
38293 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
38299 \begin_layout Standard
38300 If \SpecialChar LyX
38301 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
38302 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
38303 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
38304 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38305 packages in your document preamble that are required by
38306 the \SpecialChar TeX
38308 If \SpecialChar LyX
38309 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
38310 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
38312 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
38313 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
38314 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
38317 \begin_layout Subsection
38322 \begin_layout Standard
38323 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38324 source of the whole document or parts of it.
38327 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38329 \begin_inset space ~
38334 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38336 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
38338 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
38339 's main window, then only this selection
38340 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
38341 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
38342 the source view window.
38347 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
38348 ; but note that if you have
38349 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
38351 not just the one which is open at the time.
38354 \begin_layout Section
38355 Advanced Find and Replace
38356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38358 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38363 \begin_inset Index idx
38366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38373 \begin_inset Index idx
38376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38385 \begin_layout Subsection
38389 \begin_layout Standard
38390 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
38391 allows for searching of complex,
38392 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
38394 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
38395 The key-features are:
38398 \begin_layout Itemize
38399 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
38400 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
38401 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
38405 \begin_layout Itemize
38406 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
38407 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
38408 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
38409 a section heading will only be found within section headings
38412 \begin_layout Itemize
38413 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
38414 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
38415 outside of mathematics environments
38418 \begin_layout Itemize
38419 Search may be widened to a specific
38424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38428 \begin_inset space ~
38431 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
38432 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
38439 \begin_layout Itemize
38440 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
38441 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
38442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38446 \begin_inset space ~
38449 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
38452 \begin_layout Subsection
38456 \begin_layout Standard
38457 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
38459 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38472 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
38475 ) or the toolbar button
38478 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38484 Advanced Find and Replace
38489 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38493 \begin_layout Standard
38499 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
38503 \begin_inset space ~
38508 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
38511 arg "paragraph-break"
38515 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
38516 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
38520 arg "paragraph-break"
38523 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
38527 searches backwards.
38530 \begin_layout Standard
38534 \begin_inset space ~
38539 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
38548 \begin_inset space ~
38553 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
38556 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38557 Searching for mathematics
38560 \begin_layout Standard
38561 Mathematical formulas, such as
38562 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
38565 or something more complex like
38566 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
38569 , may be searched for by typing them in the
38574 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
38575 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
38576 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
38577 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
38583 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38587 \begin_layout Standard
38588 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
38589 This is done by switching to the
38593 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
38598 This way, entering in the
38605 \begin_layout Itemize
38606 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
38607 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
38610 \begin_layout Itemize
38611 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
38612 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
38615 \begin_layout Itemize
38616 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
38617 of it only within section headings.
38618 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
38619 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
38623 \begin_layout Itemize
38624 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
38625 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
38628 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38632 \begin_layout Standard
38633 The entries made in the
38637 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
38640 \begin_inset space ~
38646 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
38650 button or alternatively press
38653 arg "paragraph-break"
38660 while the cursor is in the
38663 \begin_inset space ~
38671 \begin_layout Standard
38672 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
38674 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
38678 \begin_layout Itemize
38679 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
38680 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
38681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38688 with its typewriter version
38689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38703 \begin_layout Itemize
38704 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
38706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38710 \begin_inset Formula $R$
38714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38722 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
38726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38729 (you may want to enable the
38732 \begin_inset space ~
38740 \begin_inset space ~
38745 options and disable the
38753 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
38754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38761 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
38762 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
38766 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
38769 , or occurrences of
38770 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
38774 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
38780 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38784 \begin_layout Standard
38785 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
38789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38790 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
38792 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38794 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
38804 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
38810 This is done with the context menu
38812 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38813 Insert Regular Expression
38815 while the cursor is in the
38820 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
38821 expression matching rules
38825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38826 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
38829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38833 \begin_inset space ~
38836 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
38837 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
38843 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
38844 same text in the document.
38845 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
38846 Examples of using such a feature may be:
38849 \begin_layout Enumerate
38850 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
38855 editor the fraction
38856 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
38860 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38863 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
38864 fractions with the given denominator.
38867 \begin_layout Enumerate
38868 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after
38869 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390777
38873 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390710
38876 'Adhere to search string formatting of'
38877 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390724
38883 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
38884 and the 'Select all'
38893 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38898 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
38899 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
38900 Also, by inserting a
38901 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38904 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
38905 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
38907 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391772
38908 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
38912 \begin_layout Description
38914 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
38915 Language Allows searching for text in specific language
38918 \begin_layout Description
38920 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392163
38922 \begin_inset space ~
38925 color colored text like cyan, yellow, etc
38928 \begin_layout Description
38930 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392038
38932 \begin_inset space ~
38935 family Roman, Sans serif, Typewriter
38938 \begin_layout Description
38940 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392204
38942 \begin_inset space ~
38949 \begin_layout Description
38951 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392249
38953 \begin_inset space ~
38957 upright, italic, ...
38960 \begin_layout Description
38962 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392299
38964 \begin_inset space ~
38971 \begin_layout Description
38973 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392343
38974 Emph/noun Semantic Markup: Emphasized, Noun
38977 \begin_layout Description
38979 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392414
38981 Single, Double, Wawy
38984 \begin_layout Description
38986 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392503
38987 Strike-through Single, With '/'
38990 \begin_layout Description
38992 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392776
38993 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
38996 \begin_layout Description
38998 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392891
39000 \begin_inset space ~
39004 title, part, chapter, section, ...
39009 \begin_layout Standard
39010 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
39011 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
39012 \begin_inset Formula $()$
39015 , and referring back to them through
39016 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
39020 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
39024 For example, try searching with the regexp
39025 \begin_inset Newline newline
39029 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393222
39041 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651393089
39042 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
39047 \begin_inset Newline newline
39050 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
39053 \begin_layout Standard
39054 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet)
39055 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393403
39061 \begin_layout Standard
39062 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39070 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
39071 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
39072 sub-expressions is absolute.
39074 \begin_inset space ~
39078 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
39081 always refers to the first occurrence of
39082 \begin_inset Formula $()$
39085 in all entered regexps.
39093 \begin_layout Section
39095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39097 name "sec:Spellchecking"
39102 \begin_inset Index idx
39105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39114 \begin_layout Standard
39116 has a built-in spell checker.
39119 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39126 key or the toolbar button
39129 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
39132 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
39133 beginning of the currently selected text.
39134 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
39135 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
39136 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
39137 scrolled so that it is visible.
39138 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
39139 n, if any could be found.
39140 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
39144 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
39145 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
39148 \begin_layout Standard
39149 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
39152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39156 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
39157 a different one at the top of the dialog.
39159 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
39160 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
39163 \begin_inset space ~
39171 arg "dialog-show character"
39174 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
39176 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
39179 \begin_layout Standard
39180 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
39181 can be downloaded from here:
39182 \begin_inset Newline newline
39186 \begin_inset Flex URL
39189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39191 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
39193 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
39194 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
39195 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
39203 \begin_inset Newline newline
39207 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
39209 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
39210 You should download
39213 \begin_inset space ~
39216 files for each language
39217 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
39222 link at the end of the opened webpage)
39225 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the
39226 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
39230 \begin_inset space ~
39233 files into \SpecialChar LyX
39234 's installation subfolder
39242 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
39244 \begin_inset Newline newline
39247 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
39248 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
39249 but in most cases these are
39265 is the language code.
39268 \begin_layout Subsection
39272 \begin_layout Standard
39275 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39276 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39278 \begin_inset space ~
39281 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39284 you can set the following things:
39287 \begin_layout Description
39289 \begin_inset space ~
39292 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
39293 should use for spell checking.
39294 Depending on your platform,
39304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39305 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
39306 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
39321 \begin_inset space ~
39324 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
39327 \begin_layout Description
39329 \begin_inset space ~
39332 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
39333 will always use the given language
39334 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
39337 \begin_layout Description
39339 \begin_inset space ~
39342 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
39344 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39348 \begin_inset space \space{}
39352 This should normally not be needed.
39355 \begin_layout Description
39357 \begin_inset space ~
39361 \begin_inset space ~
39364 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
39366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39376 \begin_layout Description
39378 \begin_inset space ~
39381 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
39382 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
39383 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
39384 appear in a context menu.
39385 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
39389 \begin_layout Description
39391 \begin_inset space ~
39395 \begin_inset space ~
39399 \begin_inset space ~
39402 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
39406 \begin_layout Section
39408 \begin_inset Index idx
39411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39420 name "sec:Thesaurus"
39427 \begin_layout Standard
39429 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
39430 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
39439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39440 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39442 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
39452 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
39454 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
39455 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
39456 which are available for many languages.
39459 \begin_layout Standard
39460 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
39461 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
39465 \begin_layout Subsection
39466 Setting up the thesaurus
39469 \begin_layout Standard
39478 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
39482 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
39487 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
39489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39493 \begin_inset space ~
39501 For instance, the US English files are named:
39504 \begin_layout Itemize
39508 \begin_layout Itemize
39512 \begin_layout Standard
39521 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
39522 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
39525 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39526 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39527 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39529 \begin_inset space ~
39534 ) to the path where they are installed.
39538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39539 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
39540 ies, typical locations are
39546 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
39550 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
39554 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
39557 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
39563 LibreOffice-<Version>
39570 On the Mac, the default location is
39572 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
39573 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39574 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
39575 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
39576 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
39577 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39585 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
39586 during the \SpecialChar LyX
39587 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
39591 \begin_layout Standard
39592 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
39594 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
39596 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
39599 thesaurus dictionaries, you can download them from here:
39600 \begin_inset Newline newline
39604 \begin_inset Flex URL
39607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39609 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
39611 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
39612 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
39613 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
39623 \begin_layout Standard
39624 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
39625 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
39627 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39628 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39629 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39631 \begin_inset space ~
39636 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
39638 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
39639 and point \SpecialChar LyX
39643 \begin_layout Standard
39644 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
39646 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
39649 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
39655 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
39658 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
39659 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
39661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39667 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39668 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39669 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39671 \begin_inset space ~
39676 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
39679 \begin_layout Subsection
39680 Using the thesaurus
39683 \begin_layout Standard
39684 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
39686 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39689 or the toolbar button
39692 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39695 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
39697 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
39699 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
39700 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
39701 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
39710 ), related terms (such as
39713 \begin_inset space ~
39722 ), compounds (such as
39725 \begin_inset space ~
39734 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
39743 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
39746 \begin_layout Standard
39747 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
39748 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
39752 \begin_layout Standard
39753 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
39754 the dictionary, such as the above
39758 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
39759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39763 \begin_inset space \space{}
39766 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
39767 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
39768 For example, looking up the word form
39772 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
39777 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
39778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39782 \begin_inset space \space{}
39793 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
39794 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
39795 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
39798 \begin_layout Section
39800 \begin_inset Index idx
39803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39810 \begin_inset Index idx
39813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39814 Document ! Change Tracking
39820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39822 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
39829 \begin_layout Standard
39830 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
39831 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
39832 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
39833 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
39835 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39837 \begin_inset space ~
39840 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39842 \begin_inset space ~
39850 \begin_layout Standard
39851 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
39865 The color depends on the author that made the change.
39866 You can change the color in
39868 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39869 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39871 \begin_inset space ~
39875 \begin_inset space ~
39880 \SpecialChar menuseparator
39886 \begin_inset Index idx
39889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39890 Color ! Change tracking
39895 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
39896 's status bar when the
39897 cursor is in changed text.
39898 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
39901 arg "changes-merge"
39907 \begin_layout Standard
39908 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
39910 \begin_inset Index idx
39913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39922 \begin_layout Standard
39923 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39929 \begin_layout Standard
39930 \begin_inset Graphics
39931 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
39939 \begin_layout Standard
39940 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39946 \begin_layout Standard
39947 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
39950 \begin_layout Standard
39951 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39957 \begin_layout Standard
39958 \begin_inset Tabular
39959 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
39960 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39961 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39962 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39963 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39972 arg "changes-track"
39980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39986 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39988 \begin_inset space ~
39991 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39993 \begin_inset space ~
40002 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40011 arg "changes-output"
40019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40025 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40027 \begin_inset space ~
40030 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40032 \begin_inset space ~
40036 \begin_inset space ~
40040 \begin_inset space ~
40049 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40070 Jumps to the next change
40076 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40085 arg "change-accept"
40093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40099 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40101 \begin_inset space ~
40104 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40106 \begin_inset space ~
40115 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40124 arg "change-reject"
40132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40138 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40140 \begin_inset space ~
40143 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40145 \begin_inset space ~
40154 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40163 arg "changes-merge"
40171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40177 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40179 \begin_inset space ~
40182 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40184 \begin_inset space ~
40193 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40202 arg "all-changes-accept"
40210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40216 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40218 \begin_inset space ~
40221 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40223 \begin_inset space ~
40227 \begin_inset space ~
40236 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40245 arg "all-changes-reject"
40253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40261 \begin_inset space ~
40264 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40266 \begin_inset space ~
40270 \begin_inset space ~
40279 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40302 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40303 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
40305 \begin_inset space ~
40314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40337 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
40339 \begin_inset space ~
40355 \begin_layout Standard
40356 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40362 \begin_layout Standard
40363 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
40383 \begin_layout Standard
40384 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
40385 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
40386 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
40387 the next change after the current cursor position.
40388 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
40389 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
40390 step to the next change.
40391 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
40394 \begin_layout Standard
40395 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
40396 to describe a change.
40399 \begin_layout Standard
40401 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
40402 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40408 \begin_inset Index idx
40411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40419 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
40421 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40428 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40434 \begin_layout Section
40435 Comparison of Documents
40436 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40438 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40443 \begin_inset Index idx
40446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40447 Comparison of documents
40455 \begin_layout Standard
40456 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
40459 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40463 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
40464 file with change tracking enabled showing the
40466 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
40468 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
40472 \begin_inset space ~
40476 \begin_inset space ~
40480 \begin_inset space ~
40489 \begin_inset space ~
40493 \begin_inset space ~
40497 \begin_inset space ~
40501 \begin_inset space ~
40505 \begin_inset space ~
40509 \begin_inset space ~
40514 enables the change tracking option
40517 \begin_inset space ~
40521 \begin_inset space ~
40525 \begin_inset space ~
40530 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
40533 \begin_layout Section
40534 International Support
40535 \begin_inset Index idx
40538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40539 International support
40547 \begin_layout Standard
40548 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
40549 with any language you want.
40550 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
40551 up \SpecialChar LyX
40553 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40555 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
40563 \begin_layout Standard
40564 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
40565 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
40566 \begin_inset space ~
40570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40572 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
40579 \begin_layout Subsection
40581 \begin_inset Index idx
40584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40591 \begin_inset Index idx
40594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40595 Document ! Settings
40601 \begin_inset Index idx
40604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40605 Document ! Language
40613 \begin_layout Standard
40616 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40617 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40620 dialog lets you set
40622 the language, the quote style and character encoding
40627 \begin_layout Standard
40632 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40637 \begin_inset space ~
40642 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
40643 For details about the different encoding options see section
40644 \begin_inset space ~
40648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40650 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
40657 \begin_layout Subsection
40658 Keyboard mapping configuration
40659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40661 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
40668 \begin_layout Standard
40669 If you have for example a U.
40670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40673 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
40674 can use an alternate keymap.
40675 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
40680 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40681 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40682 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
40685 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
40686 \begin_inset space ~
40690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40692 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
40697 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
40698 which one you want to use.
40701 \begin_layout Standard
40702 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
40703 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
40704 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
40705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40708 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
40709 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
40710 one to support the characters you want.
40711 This and many other customizations are explained in the
40718 \begin_layout Chapter
40721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40723 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
40730 \begin_layout Standard
40731 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
40732 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
40733 topic inside the user's guide.
40736 \begin_layout Section
40738 \begin_inset Index idx
40741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40750 \begin_layout Standard
40755 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
40758 \begin_layout Subsection
40762 \begin_layout Standard
40763 Creates a new document.
40766 \begin_layout Subsection
40770 \begin_layout Standard
40771 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
40772 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
40773 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
40775 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
40776 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
40782 \begin_layout Subsection
40786 \begin_layout Standard
40790 \begin_layout Subsection
40794 \begin_layout Standard
40795 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
40796 Click there on a file to open it.
40799 \begin_layout Subsection
40801 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
40805 \begin_layout Standard
40807 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
40808 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
40812 \begin_layout Subsection
40816 \begin_layout Standard
40817 Closes the current document.
40820 \begin_layout Subsection
40824 \begin_layout Standard
40825 Closes all opened documents.
40828 \begin_layout Subsection
40832 \begin_layout Standard
40833 Saves the actual document.
40836 \begin_layout Subsection
40840 \begin_layout Standard
40841 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
40842 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
40846 \begin_layout Subsection
40848 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
40852 \begin_layout Standard
40854 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
40855 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
40861 \begin_layout Subsection
40865 \begin_layout Standard
40866 Saves all opened documents.
40869 \begin_layout Subsection
40873 \begin_layout Standard
40874 Reloads the actual document from disk.
40877 \begin_layout Subsection
40881 \begin_layout Standard
40882 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
40883 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
40884 It is described in the section
40886 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
40891 Additional Features
40896 \begin_layout Subsection
40900 \begin_layout Standard
40901 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
40902 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
40904 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
40905 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
40909 \begin_layout Standard
40910 When using the menu entry
40913 \begin_inset space ~
40918 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
40922 \begin_inset space ~
40926 \begin_inset space ~
40930 \begin_inset space ~
40935 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
40936 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
40939 \begin_layout Subsection
40941 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40943 name "subsec:Export"
40950 \begin_layout Standard
40951 You can export your document to various file formats.
40952 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
40954 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
40955 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
40956 during its configuration.
40959 \begin_layout Standard
40960 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
40962 \begin_inset space ~
40966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40968 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40975 \begin_layout Description
40981 \begin_inset space ~
40984 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
40986 \begin_inset space ~
40989 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
40990 \begin_inset Newline newline
40993 Since \SpecialChar LyX
40994 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
40998 \begin_layout Description
40999 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
41005 \begin_layout Description
41007 \begin_inset space ~
41010 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
41016 \begin_layout Description
41017 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
41018 's native DVI-format.
41019 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
41020 files paths or file names in your document.
41022 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
41029 \begin_layout Description
41030 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
41031 in files paths or file names
41034 \begin_layout Description
41036 \begin_inset space ~
41043 ) DVI-format using the program
41045 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41048 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
41052 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41060 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
41068 \begin_layout Description
41070 \begin_inset space ~
41073 (cropped) the same as
41077 but with cropped page margins.
41080 \begin_layout Description
41082 \begin_inset space ~
41085 Dot text file with code in the programming language
41089 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
41094 \begin_layout Description
41098 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41106 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
41114 \begin_layout Description
41116 \begin_inset space ~
41120 \begin_inset space ~
41123 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
41127 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
41135 \begin_layout Description
41139 \begin_inset space ~
41148 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41149 source that is compilable with the program
41151 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41155 \begin_layout Description
41159 \begin_inset space ~
41164 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41165 source, additionally all images used in the document
41166 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
41170 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
41173 \begin_layout Description
41177 \begin_inset space ~
41182 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41183 source code, additionally all images used in the document
41184 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
41192 \begin_layout Description
41196 \begin_inset space ~
41205 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41206 source that is compilable with the program
41212 \begin_layout Description
41214 \begin_inset space ~
41218 \begin_inset space ~
41225 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41226 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
41232 \begin_layout Description
41234 \begin_inset space ~
41237 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
41238 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
41240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41244 \begin_inset space \space{}
41249 \begin_inset space ~
41253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41268 represent the version number)
41271 \begin_layout Description
41273 \begin_inset space ~
41277 \begin_inset space ~
41280 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
41281 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
41282 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41286 \begin_layout Description
41287 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
41288 's internal XHTML engine
41291 \begin_layout Description
41293 \begin_inset space ~
41297 \begin_inset space ~
41301 \begin_inset space ~
41305 \begin_inset space ~
41308 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
41313 For the conversion the program
41322 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41325 \begin_layout Description
41326 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
41331 \begin_layout Description
41333 \begin_inset space ~
41336 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
41338 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
41341 For the conversion the program
41350 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41353 \begin_layout Description
41355 \begin_inset space ~
41358 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
41359 For the conversion the program
41368 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41371 \begin_layout Description
41373 \begin_inset space ~
41376 (cropped) the same as
41379 \begin_inset space ~
41384 but with cropped page margins
41387 \begin_layout Description
41391 \begin_inset space ~
41396 PDF-format using the program
41400 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
41403 \begin_layout Description
41407 \begin_inset space ~
41411 \begin_inset space ~
41419 \begin_inset space ~
41424 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
41425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41429 \begin_inset space \space{}
41432 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
41436 \begin_layout Description
41440 \begin_inset space ~
41445 PDF-format using the program
41447 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41450 , produces PDF-files directly
41453 \begin_layout Description
41457 \begin_inset space ~
41462 PDF-format using the program
41466 , produces PDF-files directly
41469 \begin_layout Description
41473 \begin_inset space ~
41478 PDF-format using the program
41482 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
41485 \begin_layout Description
41489 \begin_inset space ~
41494 PDF-format using the program
41499 , produces PDF-files directly
41502 \begin_layout Description
41506 \begin_inset space ~
41514 \begin_layout Description
41518 \begin_inset space ~
41522 \begin_inset space ~
41527 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
41528 and then exported as text using the program
41533 \begin_layout Description
41538 PostScript format using the program
41546 options see section
41547 \begin_inset space ~
41551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41553 reference "subsec:General-output"
41560 \begin_layout Description
41561 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41562 source and also code in the statistical programming
41576 it is possible to use
41580 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
41584 \begin_layout Standard
41585 If one of the menu entries
41592 \begin_inset space ~
41601 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41603 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
41605 \begin_inset space ~
41609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41611 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41616 \begin_inset Index idx
41619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41620 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41629 \begin_layout Subsection
41633 \begin_layout Standard
41634 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
41635 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
41638 \begin_inset space ~
41642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41644 reference "sec:Paths"
41649 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
41658 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
41659 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
41660 's preferences as described in section
41661 \begin_inset space ~
41665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41667 reference "subsec:Converters"
41674 \begin_layout Subsection
41675 New and Close Window
41678 \begin_layout Standard
41679 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
41683 \begin_layout Subsection
41687 \begin_layout Standard
41688 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
41691 \begin_layout Section
41693 \begin_inset Index idx
41696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41705 \begin_layout Subsection
41709 \begin_layout Standard
41710 Described in section
41711 \begin_inset space ~
41715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41717 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
41724 \begin_layout Subsection
41725 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
41728 \begin_layout Standard
41729 Described in section
41730 \begin_inset space ~
41734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41736 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
41743 \begin_layout Subsection
41747 \begin_layout Standard
41748 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
41749 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
41752 \begin_layout Subsection
41756 \begin_layout Standard
41757 Selects the whole document.
41760 \begin_layout Subsection
41761 Find & Replace (Quick)
41764 \begin_layout Standard
41765 Described in section
41766 \begin_inset space ~
41770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41772 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
41779 \begin_layout Subsection
41780 Find & Replace (Advanced)
41783 \begin_layout Standard
41784 Described in section
41785 \begin_inset space ~
41789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41791 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
41798 \begin_layout Subsection
41799 Move Paragraph Up/Down
41802 \begin_layout Standard
41803 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
41807 \begin_layout Subsection
41809 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
41813 \begin_layout Standard
41815 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
41816 Described in section
41817 \begin_inset space ~
41821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41823 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
41832 \begin_layout Subsection
41834 \begin_inset Index idx
41837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41838 Paragraph ! Settings
41846 \begin_layout Standard
41847 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
41848 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
41852 \begin_layout Standard
41853 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
41854 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
41860 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41861 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41863 \begin_inset space ~
41869 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
41873 \begin_layout Subsection
41875 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
41879 \begin_layout Standard
41881 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
41882 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
41887 \begin_layout Enumerate
41889 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
41890 Customize text properties by means of the
41896 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
41899 ; this is described in section
41900 \begin_inset space ~
41904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41906 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
41913 \begin_layout Enumerate
41915 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
41916 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
41918 Apply last settings
41921 \begin_layout Enumerate
41923 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
41924 Change the casing of selected text (
41939 \begin_layout Subsection
41941 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
41945 \begin_layout Standard
41947 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
41948 This sub-menu only appears
41949 \change_inserted 630872221 1621860799
41951 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
41952 the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case
41975 \begin_inset space ~
41979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41981 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
41990 \begin_layout Subsection
41991 Table and Rows & Columns
41994 \begin_layout Standard
41995 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
41996 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
41997 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
42000 \begin_layout Subsection
42004 \begin_layout Standard
42005 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
42006 It will dissolve this inset.
42007 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
42011 \begin_layout Subsection
42015 \begin_layout Standard
42016 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
42017 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
42020 \begin_layout Subsection
42021 Increase/Decrease List Depth
42024 \begin_layout Standard
42025 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
42027 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
42028 \begin_inset space ~
42032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42034 reference "sec:Nesting"
42039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42041 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42048 \begin_layout Section
42050 \begin_inset Index idx
42053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42062 \begin_layout Standard
42063 At the bottom of the
42067 menu the opened documents are listed.
42070 \begin_layout Subsection
42071 Open/Close all Insets
42074 \begin_layout Standard
42075 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
42078 \begin_layout Subsection
42079 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
42082 \begin_layout Standard
42083 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
42086 \begin_layout Standard
42087 Math macros are described in the
42094 \begin_layout Subsection
42098 \begin_layout Standard
42099 Shows the outline window as described in sections
42100 \begin_inset space ~
42104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42106 reference "sec:Navigating"
42111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42113 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
42120 \begin_layout Subsection
42124 \begin_layout Standard
42125 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
42127 \begin_inset space ~
42131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42133 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42140 \begin_layout Subsection
42144 \begin_layout Standard
42145 Opens a window showing console messages.
42146 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
42148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42151 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
42152 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
42153 is processing the document.
42156 \begin_layout Subsection
42158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42160 name "subsec:Toolbars"
42165 \begin_inset Index idx
42168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42177 \begin_layout Standard
42178 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
42180 All toolbars and the
42183 \begin_inset space ~
42201 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
42203 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
42205 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
42209 \begin_layout Standard
42211 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
42215 \begin_inset space ~
42233 \begin_inset space ~
42245 \begin_inset space ~
42250 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
42253 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
42257 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
42259 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets
42273 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
42274 denoted in the menu with the suffix
42283 \begin_layout Standard
42288 state the toolbar is permanently shown
42289 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
42294 state it is never shown
42300 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
42301 or when a certain feature is enabled.
42302 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
42303 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
42304 is inside a formula or table respectively
42305 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
42306 , the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
42311 \begin_layout Standard
42313 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
42314 \begin_inset space ~
42318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42320 reference "sec:Toolbars"
42327 \begin_layout Subsection
42331 \begin_layout Standard
42335 \begin_inset space ~
42339 \begin_inset space ~
42343 \begin_inset space ~
42347 \begin_inset space ~
42351 \begin_inset space ~
42355 \begin_inset space ~
42360 will split \SpecialChar LyX
42361 's main window vertically while
42364 \begin_inset space ~
42368 \begin_inset space ~
42372 \begin_inset space ~
42376 \begin_inset space ~
42380 \begin_inset space ~
42384 \begin_inset space ~
42389 will split it horizontally.
42390 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
42391 to view the same document, but at different positions.
42392 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
42393 three or more documents at the same time.
42394 To close a split view, use the menu
42397 \begin_inset space ~
42401 \begin_inset space ~
42409 \begin_layout Subsection
42413 \begin_layout Standard
42414 Closes a split view.
42417 \begin_layout Subsection
42421 \begin_layout Standard
42422 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
42423 so that you will see nothing but your text.
42424 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
42425 's main window fullscreen.
42426 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
42427 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
42430 \begin_layout Section
42432 \begin_inset Index idx
42435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42444 \begin_layout Subsection
42448 \begin_layout Standard
42449 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
42450 \begin_inset space ~
42454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42456 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
42467 \begin_layout Subsection
42469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42471 name "subsec:Special-Character"
42478 \begin_layout Standard
42479 Here you can insert the following characters:
42482 \begin_layout Description
42487 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
42490 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
42491 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42492 -packages you have installed.
42493 You can get a complete display by checking
42496 \begin_inset space ~
42502 \begin_inset Newline newline
42506 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42514 Not all characters will be visible in the
42518 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
42519 dialog (see section
42520 \begin_inset space ~
42524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42526 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
42530 ) can display every character.
42538 \begin_layout Description
42539 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
42543 \begin_layout Description
42545 \begin_inset space ~
42549 \begin_inset space ~
42552 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
42553 \begin_inset space ~
42557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42559 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
42566 \begin_layout Description
42568 \begin_inset space ~
42571 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
42574 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42575 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42581 \begin_layout Description
42583 \begin_inset space ~
42586 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
42589 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42590 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42596 \begin_layout Description
42598 \begin_inset space ~
42601 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
42605 \begin_layout Description
42607 \begin_inset space ~
42610 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
42614 \begin_layout Description
42616 \begin_inset space ~
42620 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
42621 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
42627 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42632 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
42634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42638 \begin_inset space \space{}
42641 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
42642 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
42648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42651 To insert a fraction use the command
42656 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42660 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
42666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42669 The visible space is hereby the character before the
42676 \begin_layout Description
42678 \begin_inset space ~
42681 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
42685 \begin_layout Description
42687 \begin_inset space ~
42691 \begin_inset Index idx
42694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42701 \begin_inset Index idx
42704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42705 Language ! Phonetic symbols
42710 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
42711 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
42713 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42719 \begin_inset Index idx
42722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42730 \begin_inset Newline newline
42733 More information about this feature can be found in the
42739 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42745 \begin_layout Description
42746 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
42748 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
42749 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
42753 \begin_layout Subsection
42757 \begin_layout Standard
42758 Opens a submenu with the following options:
42761 \begin_layout Description
42762 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
42763 \begin_inset script superscript
42765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42774 \begin_layout Description
42775 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
42776 \begin_inset script subscript
42778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42787 \begin_layout Description
42789 \begin_inset space ~
42792 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
42793 \begin_inset space ~
42797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42799 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
42806 \begin_layout Description
42808 \begin_inset space ~
42811 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
42812 \begin_inset space ~
42816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42818 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
42825 \begin_layout Description
42827 \begin_inset space ~
42830 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
42831 \begin_inset space ~
42835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42837 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
42844 \begin_layout Description
42846 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
42848 \begin_inset space ~
42851 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
42853 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42857 \begin_inset space \space{}
42860 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
42861 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
42867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42870 To insert a fraction use the command
42875 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42879 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
42885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42888 The visible space is hereby the character before the
42897 \begin_layout Description
42899 \begin_inset space ~
42902 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
42903 \begin_inset space ~
42907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42909 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
42916 \begin_layout Description
42918 \begin_inset space ~
42921 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
42922 \begin_inset space ~
42926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42928 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
42935 \begin_layout Description
42937 \begin_inset space ~
42940 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
42941 \begin_inset space ~
42945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42947 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
42954 \begin_layout Description
42955 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
42956 \begin_inset space ~
42960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42962 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
42969 \begin_layout Description
42971 \begin_inset space ~
42974 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
42975 \begin_inset space ~
42979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42981 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
42988 \begin_layout Description
42990 \begin_inset space ~
42993 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
42994 \begin_inset space ~
42998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43000 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
43007 \begin_layout Description
43009 \begin_inset space ~
43013 \begin_inset space ~
43016 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
43019 \begin_inset space ~
43023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43025 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
43032 for a usage example.
43035 \begin_layout Description
43037 \begin_inset space ~
43041 \begin_inset space ~
43044 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
43045 \begin_inset space ~
43049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43051 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
43058 \begin_layout Description
43060 \begin_inset space ~
43063 Break Inserts a forced line break that
43064 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
43067 justifies the remaining text as described in section
43068 \begin_inset space ~
43072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43074 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
43081 \begin_layout Description
43083 \begin_inset space ~
43086 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
43087 \begin_inset space ~
43091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43093 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
43100 \begin_layout Description
43102 \begin_inset space ~
43105 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
43106 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
43108 \begin_inset space ~
43112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43114 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
43119 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
43123 \begin_layout Description
43125 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
43127 \begin_inset space ~
43131 \begin_inset space ~
43134 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
43135 to prevent a page break at the given position.
43137 \begin_inset space ~
43141 \change_inserted 630872221 1621862329
43143 \begin_inset space ~
43147 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
43149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43151 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
43160 \begin_layout Description
43162 \begin_inset space ~
43165 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
43166 \begin_inset space ~
43170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43172 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
43179 \begin_layout Description
43181 \begin_inset space ~
43185 \begin_inset space ~
43188 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
43189 \begin_inset space ~
43193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43195 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
43202 \begin_layout Subsection
43204 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43208 \begin_layout Standard
43210 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43211 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
43212 The submenu allows you to insert
43215 \begin_layout Description
43217 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43219 \begin_inset space ~
43222 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
43225 \begin_layout Description
43227 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43229 \begin_inset space ~
43233 \begin_inset space ~
43236 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
43240 \begin_layout Description
43242 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43244 \begin_inset space ~
43247 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
43250 \begin_layout Description
43252 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43254 \begin_inset space ~
43257 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
43260 \begin_layout Description
43262 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43264 \begin_inset space ~
43268 \begin_inset space ~
43271 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
43275 \begin_layout Description
43277 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43279 \begin_inset space ~
43282 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
43285 \begin_layout Description
43287 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867346
43289 \begin_inset space ~
43293 \begin_inset space ~
43297 \begin_inset space ~
43300 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
43303 \begin_layout Description
43305 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867469
43307 \begin_inset space ~
43311 \begin_inset space ~
43314 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
43316 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
43319 \begin_layout Description
43321 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43323 \begin_inset space ~
43326 Name inserts the user name as specified in
43328 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43329 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43335 \begin_layout Description
43337 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43339 \begin_inset space ~
43342 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
43344 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43345 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43351 \begin_layout Description
43353 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43354 Other\SpecialChar ldots
43355 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
43356 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
43359 \begin_layout Subsection
43362 List/Contents/References
43365 \begin_layout Standard
43366 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
43370 \begin_inset space ~
43391 are described in section
43392 \begin_inset space ~
43396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43398 reference "sec:toc"
43407 is described in section
43408 \begin_inset space ~
43412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43414 reference "sec:Index"
43422 is described in section
43423 \begin_inset space ~
43427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43429 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
43435 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43438 is described in section
43439 \begin_inset space ~
43443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43445 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
43452 \begin_layout Subsection
43456 \begin_layout Standard
43457 To insert floats, as described in section
43458 \begin_inset space ~
43462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43464 reference "sec:Floats"
43468 and in detail the chapter
43475 \begin_inset space ~
43483 \begin_layout Subsection
43487 \begin_layout Standard
43488 To insert notes, described in section
43489 \begin_inset space ~
43493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43495 reference "sec:Notes"
43502 \begin_layout Subsection
43506 \begin_layout Standard
43507 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
43509 Branches are described in section
43510 \begin_inset space ~
43514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43516 reference "sec:Branches"
43523 \begin_layout Subsection
43527 \begin_layout Standard
43528 Inserts document class-specific insets.
43529 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
43531 An example is the document class
43532 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
43534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43542 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
43546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43551 with three custom insets.
43554 Flex insets and InsetLayout
43558 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
43564 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
43567 \begin_layout Subsection
43569 \begin_inset Index idx
43572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43581 \begin_layout Standard
43582 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
43584 For more information see chapter
43586 External Document Parts
43589 \begin_inset space ~
43595 \begin_layout Subsection
43597 \begin_inset Index idx
43600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43609 \begin_layout Standard
43610 Inserts a box in a certain style.
43611 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
43618 \begin_inset space ~
43626 \begin_layout Subsection
43630 \begin_layout Standard
43635 dialog as described in section
43636 \begin_inset space ~
43640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43642 reference "sec:Bibliography"
43649 \begin_layout Subsection
43653 \begin_layout Standard
43658 as described in section
43659 \begin_inset space ~
43663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43665 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43672 \begin_layout Subsection
43676 \begin_layout Standard
43681 as described in section
43682 \begin_inset space ~
43686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43688 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43695 \begin_layout Subsection
43697 \begin_inset Index idx
43700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43707 \begin_inset Index idx
43710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43711 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
43719 \begin_layout Standard
43720 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
43721 Floats are described in section
43722 \begin_inset space ~
43726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43728 reference "sec:Floats"
43732 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
43735 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
43743 \begin_inset space ~
43751 \begin_layout Subsection
43755 \begin_layout Standard
43756 Inserts an index entry as described in section
43757 \begin_inset space ~
43761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43763 reference "sec:Index"
43770 \begin_layout Subsection
43774 \begin_layout Standard
43775 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
43776 \begin_inset space ~
43780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43782 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
43789 \begin_layout Subsection
43793 \begin_layout Standard
43794 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
43795 Tables are described in section
43796 \begin_inset space ~
43800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43802 reference "sec:Tables"
43806 and in detail in the chapter
43813 \begin_inset space ~
43821 \begin_layout Subsection
43825 \begin_layout Standard
43831 Graphics are described in section
43832 \begin_inset space ~
43836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43838 reference "sec:Graphics"
43845 \begin_layout Subsection
43849 \begin_layout Standard
43850 Inserts a URL as described in section
43851 \begin_inset space ~
43855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43857 reference "subsec:URLs"
43864 \begin_layout Subsection
43868 \begin_layout Standard
43869 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
43870 \begin_inset space ~
43874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43876 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
43883 \begin_layout Subsection
43887 \begin_layout Standard
43888 Inserts a footnote as described in section
43889 \begin_inset space ~
43893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43895 reference "sec:Footnotes"
43902 \begin_layout Subsection
43906 \begin_layout Standard
43907 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
43908 \begin_inset space ~
43912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43914 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
43921 \begin_layout Subsection
43924 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
43927 \begin_layout Standard
43928 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
43929 environments of the same type.
43931 \begin_inset space ~
43935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43937 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
43941 for an explanation.
43944 \begin_layout Subsection
43948 \begin_layout Standard
43949 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
43950 title or caption of a float.
43951 Inserts a short title as described in section
43952 \begin_inset space ~
43956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43958 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
43965 \begin_layout Subsection
43970 \begin_layout Standard
43971 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
43972 Code box as described in section
43973 \begin_inset space ~
43977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43979 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
43986 \begin_layout Subsection
43988 \begin_inset Index idx
43991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44000 \begin_layout Standard
44001 Inserts a program listings box.
44002 Program listings are explained in the chapter
44004 Program Code Listings
44009 \begin_inset space ~
44017 \begin_layout Subsection
44019 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
44023 \begin_layout Standard
44025 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
44026 Inserts the actual date.
44027 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
44034 \begin_layout Subsection
44038 \begin_layout Standard
44039 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
44040 \begin_inset space ~
44044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44046 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44053 \begin_layout Section
44055 \begin_inset Index idx
44058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44067 \begin_layout Standard
44068 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
44069 \begin_inset space ~
44072 of the current document.
44073 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
44076 \begin_layout Subsection
44080 \begin_layout Standard
44081 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
44082 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
44083 to jump, for example, between section
44084 \begin_inset space ~
44088 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
44089 \begin_inset space ~
44092 2.5 and use the submenu
44095 \begin_inset space ~
44099 \begin_inset space ~
44106 \begin_inset space ~
44112 \begin_inset space ~
44116 \begin_inset space ~
44122 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
44126 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
44132 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
44135 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
44138 \begin_layout Standard
44140 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
44141 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
44147 \begin_inset space ~
44152 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
44155 \begin_inset space ~
44160 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
44163 \begin_layout Subsection
44164 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
44167 \begin_layout Standard
44168 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
44172 \begin_layout Subsection
44176 \begin_layout Standard
44177 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
44178 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
44179 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
44183 \begin_inset space ~
44187 \begin_inset space ~
44195 \begin_layout Subsection
44199 \begin_layout Standard
44200 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
44203 The \SpecialChar LyX
44204 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
44206 \begin_inset space ~
44214 \begin_inset space ~
44219 manual for a detailed description.
44222 \begin_layout Section
44224 \begin_inset Index idx
44227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44236 \begin_layout Subsection
44240 \begin_layout Standard
44241 Change Tracking is described in section
44242 \begin_inset space ~
44246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44248 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44255 \begin_layout Subsection
44263 \begin_layout Standard
44264 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
44265 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
44266 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44268 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
44269 to the clipboard or update the view.
44270 \begin_inset Newline newline
44273 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44277 \begin_layout Standard
44280 Open Containing Directory
44282 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
44283 's temporary folder for the document.
44284 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
44285 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
44286 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
44287 For example some journals require to send the
44291 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44295 \begin_layout Subsection
44296 Start Appendix Here
44299 \begin_layout Standard
44300 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
44301 as described in section
44302 \begin_inset space ~
44306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44308 reference "sec:Appendices"
44315 \begin_layout Subsection
44317 \begin_inset space ~
44323 \begin_layout Standard
44324 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
44325 default output format for the document (menu
44327 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44328 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44329 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44331 \begin_inset space ~
44335 \begin_inset space ~
44341 \begin_inset space ~
44345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44347 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44351 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
44354 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44355 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44357 \begin_inset space ~
44360 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44362 \begin_inset space ~
44365 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44367 \begin_inset space ~
44371 \begin_inset space ~
44377 \begin_inset space ~
44381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44383 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44387 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
44388 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
44390 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44391 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44393 \begin_inset space ~
44396 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44398 \begin_inset space ~
44401 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44405 \begin_inset space ~
44409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44411 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44416 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
44417 when it is first configured.
44418 The default output format is
44421 \begin_inset space ~
44429 \begin_layout Subsection
44430 View (Other Formats)
44433 \begin_layout Standard
44434 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
44435 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
44436 actual document with an external program.
44437 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
44438 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44439 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
44441 All possible formats are listed in section
44442 \begin_inset space ~
44446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44448 reference "subsec:Export"
44453 You should at least see the menu entry
44458 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44460 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
44462 \begin_inset space ~
44466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44468 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
44473 \begin_inset Index idx
44476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44477 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44486 \begin_layout Standard
44487 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
44488 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
44490 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44491 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44493 \begin_inset space ~
44496 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44498 \begin_inset space ~
44501 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44505 \begin_inset space ~
44509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44511 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44516 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
44517 when it is first configured.
44520 \begin_layout Subsection
44522 \begin_inset space ~
44528 \begin_layout Standard
44529 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
44530 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
44533 \begin_layout Subsection
44534 Update (Other Formats)
44537 \begin_layout Standard
44538 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
44539 your document without opening a new viewer window.
44542 \begin_layout Subsection
44543 View Master Document
44546 \begin_layout Standard
44547 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
44549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44563 \begin_inset space ~
44568 manual for more information on this topic).
44569 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
44570 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
44574 \begin_inset space ~
44578 \begin_inset space ~
44583 generates the output of the whole book, while
44587 will just output the chapter alone.
44590 \begin_layout Standard
44591 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
44592 in the document settings (menu
44594 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44595 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44596 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44598 \begin_inset space ~
44602 \begin_inset space ~
44608 \begin_inset space ~
44612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44614 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44618 ) or in the preferences (menu
44620 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44621 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44623 \begin_inset space ~
44626 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44628 \begin_inset space ~
44631 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44633 \begin_inset space ~
44637 \begin_inset space ~
44643 \begin_inset space ~
44647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44649 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44656 \begin_layout Subsection
44657 Update Master Document
44660 \begin_layout Standard
44661 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
44663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44677 \begin_inset space ~
44682 manual for more information on this topic).
44683 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
44684 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
44687 \begin_layout Standard
44688 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
44689 in the document settings (menu
44691 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44692 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44693 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44695 \begin_inset space ~
44699 \begin_inset space ~
44705 \begin_inset space ~
44709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44711 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44715 ) or in the preferences (menu
44717 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44718 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44720 \begin_inset space ~
44723 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44725 \begin_inset space ~
44728 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44730 \begin_inset space ~
44734 \begin_inset space ~
44740 \begin_inset space ~
44744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44746 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44753 \begin_layout Subsection
44755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44757 name "subsec:Compressed"
44764 \begin_layout Standard
44765 Un/compresses the current document.
44766 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
44767 compression (see the
44769 Additional Features
44771 manual for details).
44774 \begin_layout Subsection
44778 \begin_layout Standard
44779 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
44782 \begin_layout Subsection
44786 \begin_layout Standard
44787 The document settings are described in appendix
44788 \begin_inset space ~
44792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44794 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44801 \begin_layout Section
44803 \begin_inset Index idx
44806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44815 \begin_layout Subsection
44819 \begin_layout Standard
44820 Spell checking is explained in section
44821 \begin_inset space ~
44825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44827 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44834 \begin_layout Subsection
44838 \begin_layout Standard
44839 The thesaurus is described in section
44840 \begin_inset space ~
44844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44846 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
44853 \begin_layout Subsection
44855 \begin_inset Index idx
44858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44865 \begin_inset Index idx
44868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44877 \begin_layout Standard
44878 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
44879 the highlighted document part.
44882 \begin_layout Subsection
44888 \begin_inset Index idx
44891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44892 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
44901 \begin_layout Standard
44902 Generates with the help of the program
44904 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
44907 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
44908 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
44909 This feature is not available on Windows.
44912 \begin_layout Subsection
44918 \begin_inset Index idx
44921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44931 \begin_layout Standard
44932 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44937 \begin_inset space ~
44942 to see the full filename paths.
44945 \begin_layout Subsection
44947 \begin_inset Index idx
44950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44959 \begin_layout Standard
44960 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
44961 files as described in section
44962 \begin_inset space ~
44966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44968 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
44975 \begin_layout Subsection
44977 \begin_inset Index idx
44980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44993 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45011 \begin_inset Index idx
45014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45015 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
45024 \begin_layout Standard
45025 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
45026 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
45027 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45028 -packages and programs it needs; see
45030 \begin_inset space ~
45034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45036 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
45043 \begin_layout Subsection
45047 \begin_layout Standard
45052 dialog as described in detail in appendix
45053 \begin_inset space ~
45057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45059 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45066 \begin_layout Section
45068 \begin_inset Index idx
45071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45080 \begin_layout Standard
45081 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
45082 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
45084 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
45088 \begin_layout Standard
45092 \begin_inset space ~
45097 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
45098 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45099 packages and classes found
45100 by \SpecialChar LyX
45102 \begin_inset space ~
45106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45108 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
45115 \begin_layout Standard
45119 \begin_inset space ~
45124 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
45129 \begin_layout Section
45131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45133 name "sec:Toolbars"
45140 \begin_layout Standard
45141 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
45142 \begin_inset space ~
45146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45148 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
45155 \begin_layout Standard
45156 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
45157 This is described in the
45159 Additional Features
45164 \begin_layout Subsection
45166 \begin_inset Index idx
45169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45178 \begin_layout Standard
45179 \begin_inset Graphics
45180 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
45188 \begin_layout Standard
45189 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45195 \begin_layout Standard
45196 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45213 \begin_inset Note Note
45216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45217 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
45222 manual for more information.
45230 \begin_layout Standard
45231 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45237 \begin_layout Standard
45238 \begin_inset Tabular
45239 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
45240 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45241 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45242 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45248 \begin_inset Graphics
45249 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
45259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45263 pull-down box for the environments
45276 \begin_layout Standard
45277 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
45283 \begin_layout Standard
45285 \begin_inset Tabular
45286 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
45287 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45288 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45289 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45290 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45313 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45320 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45343 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45350 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45373 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45380 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45389 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
45397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45403 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45410 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45419 arg "spelling-continuously"
45427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45431 Spellcheck continuously
45437 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45460 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45467 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45490 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45497 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45520 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45527 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45550 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45557 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45580 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45582 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
45587 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45596 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45605 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
45613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45619 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45629 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45638 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45645 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
45653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45659 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45678 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45687 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
45695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45701 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45702 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
45709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45730 Emphasize text, function of the
45731 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
45734 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45736 \begin_inset space ~
45739 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45741 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
45747 arg "dialog-show character"
45758 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45779 Set text to noun style, function of the
45780 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
45783 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45785 \begin_inset space ~
45788 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45790 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
45796 arg "dialog-show character"
45807 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45813 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
45816 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
45824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45829 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
45832 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45845 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
45850 arg "textstyle-apply"
45860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45865 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
45866 Format text using the current settings in the
45868 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45870 \begin_inset space ~
45873 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45884 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45907 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45908 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45910 \begin_inset space ~
45919 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45928 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
45936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45942 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45949 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45956 arg "tabular-insert"
45964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45970 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45977 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45983 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
45986 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
45994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45999 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
46002 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46009 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46018 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
46026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46030 Toggle outline window on/off,
46032 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46039 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46048 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
46056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46060 Toggle math toolbar on/off
46066 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46075 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
46083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46087 Toggle table toolbar on/off
46100 \begin_layout Subsection
46102 \begin_inset Index idx
46105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46114 \begin_layout Standard
46115 \begin_inset Graphics
46116 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
46124 \begin_layout Standard
46125 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46131 \begin_layout Standard
46132 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
46136 \begin_layout Standard
46137 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46143 \begin_layout Standard
46144 \begin_inset Tabular
46145 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
46146 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
46147 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46148 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46149 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46176 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46185 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
46193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46203 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46212 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
46220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46230 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46239 arg "layout-toggle List"
46247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46257 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46266 arg "layout-toggle Description"
46274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46284 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46293 arg "depth-increment"
46301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46307 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46309 \begin_inset space ~
46313 \begin_inset space ~
46322 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46331 arg "depth-decrement"
46339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46345 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46347 \begin_inset space ~
46351 \begin_inset space ~
46360 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46369 arg "float-insert figure"
46377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46383 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46384 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
46391 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46400 arg "float-insert table"
46408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46414 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46415 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
46422 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46445 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46452 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46461 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
46469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46475 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46482 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46491 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
46499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46505 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46512 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46535 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46537 \begin_inset space ~
46546 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46555 arg "nomencl-insert"
46563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46569 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46571 \begin_inset space ~
46580 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46589 arg "footnote-insert"
46597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46603 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46610 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46619 arg "marginalnote-insert"
46627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46633 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46635 \begin_inset space ~
46644 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46668 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
46670 \begin_inset space ~
46679 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46688 arg "box-insert Frameless"
46696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46732 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46739 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46762 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46764 \begin_inset space ~
46773 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46782 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
46790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46796 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46797 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
46804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46813 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
46821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46827 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46828 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46830 \begin_inset space ~
46839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46848 arg "dialog-show character"
46856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46862 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46864 \begin_inset space ~
46867 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
46874 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46880 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
46885 arg "textstyle-apply"
46893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46898 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
46899 Format text using the recent settings in the
46902 arg "dialog-show character"
46911 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46920 arg "layout-paragraph"
46928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46934 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46936 \begin_inset space ~
46945 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46954 arg "thesaurus-entry"
46962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46968 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46982 \begin_layout Subsection
46983 View/Update Toolbar
46984 \begin_inset Index idx
46987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46988 Toolbar ! View / Update
46996 \begin_layout Standard
46997 \begin_inset Graphics
46998 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
47005 \begin_layout Standard
47006 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47012 \begin_layout Standard
47013 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
47017 \begin_layout Standard
47018 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47024 \begin_layout Standard
47025 \begin_inset Tabular
47026 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
47027 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
47028 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
47029 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
47030 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47053 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47060 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47069 arg "buffer-update"
47077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47090 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47099 arg "master-buffer-view"
47107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47113 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47115 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
47117 \begin_inset space ~
47123 \begin_inset space ~
47132 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47141 arg "master-buffer-update"
47149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47155 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47157 \begin_inset space ~
47161 \begin_inset space ~
47170 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47179 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
47187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47193 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47194 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47196 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
47198 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
47201 \SpecialChar menuseparator
47202 Synchronize with Output
47208 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47219 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
47229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47235 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47236 View (Other Formats)
47242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47249 arg "update-others"
47253 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
47261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47267 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47268 Update (Other Formats)
47281 \begin_layout Standard
47283 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
47284 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
47290 \begin_layout Subsection
47294 \begin_layout Standard
47295 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
47296 \begin_inset space ~
47300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47302 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47306 , the table toolbar
47307 \begin_inset Index idx
47310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47319 \begin_inset space ~
47324 manual and the math macro toolbar
47325 \begin_inset Index idx
47328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47341 \begin_layout Chapter
47342 The Document Settings
47343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47345 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
47350 \begin_inset Index idx
47353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47354 Document ! Settings
47362 \begin_layout Standard
47366 \begin_inset space ~
47371 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
47372 is called with the menu
47374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47378 You can save your document settings as default with the
47380 Save as Document Defaults
47382 button in any dialog.
47383 This will create a template named
47387 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
47388 when you create a new document without
47392 \begin_layout Standard
47397 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
47398 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
47401 \begin_layout Standard
47402 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
47403 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
47404 to find the one you are looking for.
47405 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
47406 the submenus of the dialog.
47408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47412 \begin_inset space \space{}
47416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47423 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
47424 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
47425 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
47428 \begin_layout Section
47432 \begin_layout Standard
47433 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
47435 Document classes are described in section
47436 \begin_inset space ~
47440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47442 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
47449 \begin_layout Standard
47453 \begin_inset space ~
47458 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
47463 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
47464 as a layout for a document class.
47465 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
47467 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
47476 \begin_layout Standard
47477 Some classes use special class options by default.
47478 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
47482 and you can decide to use them or not.
47483 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
47484 recommended you leave them untouched.
47489 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47490 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
47495 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47497 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
47502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47503 When you want to use one of the following drivers
47504 \begin_inset Newline newline
47509 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
47512 \begin_inset Newline newline
47515 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47516 distribution, see section
47521 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47523 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
47536 \begin_layout Standard
47541 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
47542 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
47543 in the background if the child document
47544 is opened without its master.
47545 This way child documents are always compilable.
47546 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
47553 \begin_inset space ~
47561 \begin_layout Standard
47562 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47573 \begin_inset Index idx
47576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47578 packages ! prettyref
47584 \begin_inset Index idx
47587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47589 packages ! refstyle
47594 for cross-references, see section
47595 \begin_inset space ~
47599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47601 reference "sec:Cross-References"
47608 \begin_layout Section
47612 \begin_layout Standard
47613 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
47614 Please refer to the section
47617 \begin_inset space ~
47625 \begin_inset space ~
47630 manual for details.
47633 \begin_layout Section
47637 \begin_layout Standard
47638 Modules are explained in section
47639 \begin_inset space ~
47643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47645 reference "subsec:Modules"
47652 \begin_layout Section
47656 \begin_layout Standard
47658 \begin_inset space ~
47662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47664 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
47671 \begin_layout Section
47675 \begin_layout Standard
47676 The document font settings are described in section
47677 \begin_inset space ~
47681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47683 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
47690 \begin_layout Section
47694 \begin_layout Standard
47695 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
47707 \begin_inset space ~
47712 and whether it should be a
47715 \begin_inset space ~
47720 can also be specified here.
47723 \begin_layout Standard
47724 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
47725 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
47726 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
47728 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
47731 \begin_layout Standard
47734 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
47737 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
47738 justifies the text on screen.
47739 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
47741 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
47745 \begin_layout Standard
47747 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
47756 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
47761 \begin_layout Section
47765 \begin_layout Standard
47766 This dialog is described in sections
47767 \begin_inset space ~
47771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47773 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
47778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47780 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
47787 \begin_layout Section
47791 \begin_layout Standard
47792 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
47793 \begin_inset space ~
47797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47799 reference "subsec:Margins"
47806 \begin_layout Section
47808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47810 name "sec:Language-encodings"
47815 \begin_inset Index idx
47818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47819 Language ! Encoding
47827 \begin_layout Standard
47828 The document language and quote styles are set here.
47829 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
47830 (the \SpecialChar LyX
47832 is always encoded in utf8).
47833 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
47834 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
47835 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
47836 -command is not known for
47837 a particular character).
47838 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
47842 \begin_layout Standard
47844 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
47845 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
47846 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
47847 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
47848 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
47849 's default encoding).
47850 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
47851 's Unicode support covers the
47852 characters of most scripts.
47853 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
47854 using one of the traditional, or
47855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47862 , encodings is necessary.
47865 \begin_layout Standard
47867 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
47869 provides support for these traditional encodings.
47872 Traditional (auto-selected)
47878 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
47879 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
47880 the given language(s).
47882 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
47886 \begin_layout Standard
47888 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
47889 If you use the option
47894 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
47897 If the document contains text in more than one language you
47898 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
47901 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47904 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
47905 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
47906 exactly one encoding.
47907 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
47912 \begin_layout Standard
47914 \change_deleted 630872221 1621942852
47915 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
47921 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
47922 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
47924 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
47928 \begin_layout Standard
47930 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
47931 Finally, you can also select
47935 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
47936 Note that this encoding is then used for
47941 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
47942 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
47946 \begin_layout Standard
47948 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47950 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943769
47954 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943773
47955 Do not load inputenc
47956 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47960 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943234
47962 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943236
47964 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47966 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943278
47967 in the next dropdown menu
47968 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47969 does what it states:
47970 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943783
47972 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943782
47974 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47975 t prevents \SpecialChar LyX
47976 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47982 \begin_inset Index idx
47985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47987 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
47989 packages ! inputenc
47997 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
47998 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
47999 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
48000 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
48001 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
48003 Note that this option is only available for the standard
48009 Traditional (auto-selected)
48016 \begin_layout Standard
48018 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
48020 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
48021 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
48022 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
48023 installation supports Unicode), choose
48024 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
48025 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
48026 is quite incomplete, so
48027 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
48032 (when \SpecialChar LyX
48033 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
48034 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
48035 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
48036 -commands is not used, because all
48037 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
48038 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48039 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48040 , two new alternative engines
48041 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
48043 Both engines support Unicode natively.
48045 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
48048 \begin_inset space ~
48056 \begin_inset space ~
48064 \begin_inset space ~
48070 \begin_inset space ~
48074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48076 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
48081 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
48085 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
48090 \begin_layout Standard
48094 \begin_inset space ~
48099 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48100 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
48102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48110 The possible settings are:
48113 \begin_layout Description
48114 Default uses the language package that is selected in
48116 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48117 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48121 \begin_inset space ~
48125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48127 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
48134 \begin_layout Description
48135 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
48136 format you will use.
48137 In many cases this will be
48142 \begin_inset Index idx
48145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48153 If the newer package
48158 \begin_inset Index idx
48161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48163 packages ! polyglossia
48168 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48169 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48170 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
48172 this package will be used instead of
48179 \begin_layout Description
48181 \begin_inset space ~
48192 would be more appropriate.
48195 \begin_layout Description
48196 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
48197 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
48201 (for German texts), type in
48204 \begin_inset Newline newline
48209 usepackage{ngerman}
48212 \begin_layout Description
48213 None will not use a language package.
48214 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
48217 \begin_layout Standard
48218 Here is a list with the important encodings:
48221 \begin_layout Description
48223 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
48225 \begin_inset space ~
48229 \begin_inset space ~
48233 \begin_inset space ~
48240 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48246 \begin_inset Index idx
48249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48251 packages ! inputenc
48257 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
48258 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
48259 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
48265 \begin_layout Description
48266 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
48268 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
48269 commands, which may result in a big
48270 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
48271 -commands are needed.
48273 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943931
48274 This is the same as the
48287 \begin_layout Description
48289 \begin_inset space ~
48293 \begin_inset space ~
48296 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
48299 \begin_layout Description
48301 \begin_inset space ~
48305 \begin_inset space ~
48308 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
48311 \begin_layout Description
48313 \begin_inset space ~
48316 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
48319 \begin_layout Description
48321 \begin_inset space ~
48325 \begin_inset space ~
48328 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
48329 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
48332 \begin_layout Description
48334 \begin_inset space ~
48338 \begin_inset space ~
48341 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
48345 \begin_layout Description
48347 \begin_inset space ~
48351 \begin_inset space ~
48354 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
48355 ISO-8859-13 encoding
48358 \begin_layout Description
48360 \begin_inset space ~
48364 \begin_inset space ~
48368 \begin_inset space ~
48371 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
48372 \begin_inset space ~
48378 \begin_layout Description
48380 \begin_inset space ~
48384 \begin_inset space ~
48388 \begin_inset space ~
48391 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
48392 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
48395 \begin_layout Description
48397 \begin_inset space ~
48401 \begin_inset space ~
48404 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
48405 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
48406 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48407 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
48408 \begin_inset space ~
48412 \begin_inset space ~
48418 \begin_layout Description
48420 \begin_inset space ~
48424 \begin_inset space ~
48427 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
48428 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
48429 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48431 should try to use the encoding Unicode
48432 \begin_inset space ~
48436 \begin_inset space ~
48442 \begin_layout Description
48444 \begin_inset space ~
48448 \begin_inset space ~
48451 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
48454 \begin_layout Description
48456 \begin_inset space ~
48460 \begin_inset space ~
48463 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
48466 \begin_layout Description
48468 \begin_inset space ~
48472 \begin_inset space ~
48475 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
48478 \begin_layout Description
48480 \begin_inset space ~
48483 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
48486 \begin_layout Description
48488 \begin_inset space ~
48491 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
48494 \begin_layout Description
48496 \begin_inset space ~
48500 \begin_inset space ~
48503 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
48506 \begin_layout Description
48508 \begin_inset space ~
48512 \begin_inset space ~
48518 \begin_layout Description
48520 \begin_inset space ~
48524 \begin_inset space ~
48527 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
48530 \begin_layout Description
48532 \begin_inset space ~
48536 \begin_inset space ~
48542 \begin_layout Description
48544 \begin_inset space ~
48548 \begin_inset space ~
48551 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48557 \begin_inset Index idx
48560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48567 , when using this, set the document language to
48572 \begin_layout Description
48574 \begin_inset space ~
48578 \begin_inset space ~
48581 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48586 , when using this, set the document language to
48589 \begin_inset space ~
48595 \begin_layout Description
48597 \begin_inset space ~
48601 \begin_inset space ~
48604 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48610 \begin_inset Index idx
48613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48615 packages ! japanese
48620 , when using this, set the document language to
48625 \begin_layout Description
48627 \begin_inset space ~
48631 \begin_inset space ~
48634 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48639 , when using this, set the document language to
48644 \begin_layout Description
48646 \begin_inset space ~
48650 \begin_inset space ~
48653 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48658 , when using this, set the document language to
48663 \begin_layout Description
48665 \begin_inset space ~
48668 (EUC-KR) for Korean
48671 \begin_layout Description
48673 \begin_inset space ~
48677 \begin_inset space ~
48681 \begin_inset space ~
48684 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
48687 \begin_layout Description
48689 \begin_inset space ~
48693 \begin_inset space ~
48697 \begin_inset space ~
48700 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
48701 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
48702 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
48705 \begin_layout Description
48707 \begin_inset space ~
48711 \begin_inset space ~
48717 \begin_layout Description
48719 \begin_inset space ~
48723 \begin_inset space ~
48726 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
48727 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
48730 \begin_layout Description
48732 \begin_inset space ~
48736 \begin_inset space ~
48739 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48745 \begin_inset Index idx
48748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48755 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
48756 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
48758 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
48759 with the default encoding (
48761 Unicode (utf8) [default]
48767 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
48768 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48773 \begin_layout Description
48775 \begin_inset space ~
48783 \begin_inset space ~
48786 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
48793 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48796 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48803 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48804 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48806 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48809 \begin_layout Description
48811 \begin_inset space ~
48815 \begin_inset space ~
48818 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48824 \begin_inset Index idx
48827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48835 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
48838 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
48840 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
48841 This used to be more comprehensive than
48844 \begin_inset space ~
48849 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
48854 \begin_layout Description
48856 \begin_inset space ~
48859 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48865 \begin_inset Index idx
48868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48870 packages ! inputenc
48877 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
48878 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
48880 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
48881 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
48882 with the default encoding (
48884 Unicode (utf8) [default]
48890 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
48891 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48896 \begin_layout Description
48898 \begin_inset space ~
48902 \begin_inset space ~
48906 \begin_inset space ~
48909 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
48910 \begin_inset space ~
48916 \begin_layout Description
48918 \begin_inset space ~
48922 \begin_inset space ~
48926 \begin_inset space ~
48929 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
48930 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
48931 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
48935 \begin_layout Description
48937 \begin_inset space ~
48941 \begin_inset space ~
48945 \begin_inset space ~
48948 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
48949 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
48952 \begin_layout Section
48954 \begin_inset Index idx
48957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48964 \begin_inset Index idx
48967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48974 \begin_inset Index idx
48977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48978 Color ! Shaded boxes
48984 \begin_inset Index idx
48987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48988 Color ! Greyed-out notes
48996 \begin_layout Standard
48997 Here you can alter the font color for the
49001 (default: black), for
49004 \begin_inset space ~
49009 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
49013 (default: white) and for
49016 \begin_inset space ~
49026 sets the color back to the default.
49029 \begin_layout Standard
49030 Clicking any button showing
49038 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
49039 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
49040 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
49041 later more quickly.
49044 \begin_layout Standard
49045 Note, if you change the
49048 \begin_inset space ~
49053 font color and use the option
49056 \begin_inset space ~
49061 in the document settings under
49064 \begin_inset space ~
49069 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
49070 \begin_inset space ~
49074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49076 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
49083 \begin_layout Standard
49084 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
49090 \begin_layout Standard
49094 \begin_inset space ~
49103 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
49106 \begin_inset space ~
49109 Code after a forced page break:
49112 \begin_layout Itemize
49113 For the page color:
49114 \begin_inset Newline newline
49121 pagecolor{color name}
49124 \begin_layout Itemize
49125 For the text color:
49126 \begin_inset Newline newline
49136 \begin_layout Standard
49137 You are restricted to one of
49173 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
49180 \begin_inset space ~
49186 \begin_inset Newline newline
49189 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
49190 names to refer to them:
49193 \begin_layout Itemize
49199 \begin_inset Newline newline
49204 page_backgroundcolor
49207 \begin_layout Itemize
49211 \begin_inset space ~
49217 \begin_inset Newline newline
49225 \begin_layout Itemize
49229 \begin_inset space ~
49235 \begin_inset Newline newline
49243 \begin_layout Itemize
49247 \begin_inset space ~
49253 \begin_inset Newline newline
49261 \begin_layout Standard
49262 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
49265 \begin_inset space ~
49273 \begin_inset space ~
49281 \begin_layout Section
49283 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
49287 \begin_layout Standard
49289 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
49290 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
49291 \begin_inset space ~
49295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49297 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49305 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
49306 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
49309 \begin_layout Standard
49311 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
49312 Additionally, you can advise
49313 \change_inserted 630872221 1622044204
49316 \change_deleted 630872221 1622044196
49318 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
49319 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
49320 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
49323 \begin_layout Section
49327 \begin_layout Standard
49328 Here you can adjust the
49332 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
49336 as described in section
49337 \begin_inset space ~
49341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49343 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
49348 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
49352 \begin_layout Standard
49354 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
49355 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
49357 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of
49358 this package can be used as well.
49359 The most common one are:
49362 \begin_layout Description
49364 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
49365 right Line numbers to the right margin
49368 \begin_layout Description
49370 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
49371 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
49375 \begin_layout Description
49377 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
49378 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
49381 \begin_layout Description
49383 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
49384 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
49387 \begin_layout Description
49389 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
49390 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
49393 \begin_layout Description
49395 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
49397 \begin_inset space ~
49400 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
49405 \begin_layout Section
49409 \begin_layout Standard
49410 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49416 \begin_inset Index idx
49419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49421 packages ! biblatex
49431 \begin_inset Index idx
49434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49446 \begin_inset Index idx
49449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49457 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49460 Sectioned bibliography
49462 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49468 \begin_inset Index idx
49471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49473 packages ! bibtopic
49483 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
49484 Finally, you can select a document-specific
49488 for the generation of the bibliography.
49489 For a further description of these possibilities see section
49490 \begin_inset space ~
49494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49496 reference "sec:Bibliography"
49503 \begin_layout Section
49507 \begin_layout Standard
49508 Here you can define the
49512 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
49514 \begin_inset space ~
49518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49520 reference "sec:Index"
49527 \begin_layout Section
49531 \begin_layout Standard
49532 The PDF properties are explained in section
49533 \begin_inset space ~
49537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49539 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
49546 \begin_layout Section
49550 \begin_layout Standard
49551 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
49552 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49558 \begin_inset Index idx
49561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49573 \begin_inset Index idx
49576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49588 \begin_inset Index idx
49591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49603 \begin_inset Index idx
49606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49618 \begin_inset Index idx
49621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49623 packages ! mathdots
49633 \begin_inset Index idx
49636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49638 packages ! mathtools
49648 \begin_inset Index idx
49651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49663 \begin_inset Index idx
49666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49668 packages ! stackrel
49678 \begin_inset Index idx
49681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49683 packages ! stmaryrd
49693 \begin_inset Index idx
49696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49698 packages ! undertilde
49703 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
49706 \begin_layout Description
49707 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
49708 -errors in formulas,
49709 ensure that you have this enabled.
49712 \begin_layout Description
49713 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
49714 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
49715 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
49719 \begin_layout Description
49720 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
49723 \begin_inset space ~
49735 \begin_layout Description
49736 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
49739 \begin_inset space ~
49751 \begin_layout Description
49752 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
49763 \begin_layout Description
49764 mathtools is used for the math commands
49800 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
49807 \begin_layout Description
49808 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
49810 Chemical Symbols and Equations
49819 \begin_layout Description
49820 stackrel is used for the math command
49837 \begin_layout Description
49838 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
49841 \begin_layout Description
49842 undertilde is used for the math command
49850 Accents for one Character
49859 \begin_layout Section
49861 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
49863 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
49869 \begin_layout Standard
49871 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
49872 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
49875 \begin_layout Standard
49877 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
49878 The float placement options
49879 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
49882 are described in the section
49885 \begin_inset space ~
49889 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
49891 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
49899 \begin_inset space ~
49907 \begin_layout Section
49911 \begin_layout Standard
49912 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
49914 Program Code Listings
49919 \begin_inset space ~
49927 \begin_layout Section
49931 \begin_layout Standard
49932 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
49940 set to be used and set the
49945 The itemize environment is described in section
49946 \begin_inset space ~
49950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49952 reference "sec:Itemize"
49959 \begin_layout Standard
49960 You can furthermore specify a
49963 \begin_inset space ~
49968 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49969 command of the desired character.
49970 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
49977 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
49979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49983 \begin_inset space \space{}
49987 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
49997 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
49998 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
50001 \begin_layout Standard
50002 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50010 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50011 -packages in the preamble (menu
50014 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50015 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50018 \begin_inset space ~
50024 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
50028 usepackage{textcomp}
50031 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
50035 usepackage{amssymb}
50045 \begin_layout Section
50049 \begin_layout Standard
50050 Branches are described in section
50051 \begin_inset space ~
50055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50057 reference "sec:Branches"
50064 \begin_layout Section
50066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50068 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
50075 \begin_layout Standard
50076 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
50079 \begin_layout Description
50081 \begin_inset space ~
50085 \begin_inset space ~
50088 Format: The format that is used when you enter
50089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50108 View Master Document
50109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50116 Update Master Document
50117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50124 menu or the toolbar.
50125 The default is set in
50127 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50128 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50130 \begin_inset space ~
50133 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50137 \begin_inset space ~
50141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50143 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50150 \begin_layout Description
50152 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
50154 \begin_inset space ~
50158 \begin_inset space ~
50162 \begin_inset space ~
50165 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
50170 option which is needed with some packages.
50171 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
50172 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
50175 \begin_layout Description
50177 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
50179 \begin_inset space ~
50183 \begin_inset space ~
50186 Options offers settings for the
50194 \begin_layout Itemize
50198 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
50200 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
50202 \begin_inset space ~
50208 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
50210 \begin_inset space ~
50214 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
50220 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
50222 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
50223 settings for the menu
50225 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50229 \begin_inset space ~
50233 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
50236 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
50237 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
50242 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
50244 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
50246 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
50249 or a detailed description see section
50251 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50256 \begin_inset space ~
50262 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
50266 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
50270 \begin_layout Itemize
50272 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
50275 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
50277 determines whether so-called
50278 \begin_inset Quotes els
50282 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50286 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
50288 \begin_inset Quotes els
50292 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50295 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
50296 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
50297 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
50299 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
50301 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
50302 macros, you can uncheck this.
50303 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
50310 \begin_layout Description
50312 \begin_inset space ~
50316 \begin_inset space ~
50319 Options offers settings for the export format
50327 \begin_inset space ~
50332 will assure that the output follows exactly version
50333 \begin_inset space ~
50336 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
50340 \begin_inset space ~
50345 settings are described in detail in section
50347 Math Output in XHTML
50352 \begin_inset space ~
50361 \begin_inset space ~
50365 \begin_inset space ~
50370 is used for the size of equations in the output.
50373 \begin_layout Description
50375 \begin_inset space ~
50380 Save transient properties
50382 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
50383 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
50384 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
50388 \begin_layout Itemize
50389 the activation of change tracking
50392 \begin_layout Itemize
50393 the output of tracked changes
50396 \begin_layout Itemize
50397 the recording of the document directory path.
50400 \begin_layout Standard
50401 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
50402 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
50406 \begin_layout Section
50414 \begin_layout Standard
50415 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50417 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
50419 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50421 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
50425 \begin_layout Standard
50426 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50427 -syntax is given in section
50428 \begin_inset space ~
50432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50434 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
50441 \begin_layout Chapter
50447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50449 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
50454 \begin_inset Index idx
50457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50466 \begin_layout Standard
50467 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
50469 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50473 It has the following submenus.
50476 \begin_layout Section
50480 \begin_layout Subsection
50484 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50485 User Interface File
50486 \begin_inset Index idx
50489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50490 Customization ! of toolbars
50496 \begin_inset Index idx
50499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50500 Customization ! of menus
50508 \begin_layout Standard
50509 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
50510 interface (ui) file.
50511 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
50519 \begin_layout Description
50524 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
50527 \begin_layout Description
50534 the menu entries in popup context menus
50537 \begin_layout Description
50542 specifies the toolbar buttons
50545 \begin_layout Standard
50546 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
50547 and edit the entries.
50550 \begin_layout Standard
50551 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
50563 entries must be finished with an explicit
50588 and in the case of the
50589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50601 The syntax for the entries is:
50604 \begin_layout Standard
50605 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50634 \begin_layout Standard
50636 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50639 All the \SpecialChar LyX
50640 -functions are listed in the menu
50642 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
50644 \begin_inset space ~
50652 \begin_layout Standard
50653 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
50659 \begin_layout Standard
50660 For example, assuming you use the menu
50662 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50665 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
50669 \begin_layout Standard
50670 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50694 \begin_layout Standard
50696 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50711 to have the sixth bookmark.
50714 \begin_layout Standard
50718 \begin_inset space ~
50723 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
50724 's toolbar buttons.
50725 The currently available icon sets are compared in
50726 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50729 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
50737 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50741 \begin_layout Standard
50744 Enable tool tips in main work area
50746 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
50750 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50754 \begin_layout Standard
50759 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
50760 should display in the menu
50762 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50764 \begin_inset space ~
50772 \begin_layout Subsection
50776 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50780 \begin_layout Standard
50783 Restore window layouts and geometries
50786 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
50787 the last \SpecialChar LyX
50791 \begin_layout Standard
50794 Restore cursor positions
50796 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
50800 \begin_layout Standard
50803 Load opened files from last session
50805 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
50809 \begin_layout Standard
50812 Clear all session information
50814 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
50815 sessions (cursor positions, names
50816 of last opened documents, etc.).
50819 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50823 name "subsec:Backup documents"
50828 \begin_inset Index idx
50831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50840 \begin_layout Standard
50843 Backup original documents when saving
50845 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
50846 it was saved the last time.
50847 It is stored in the
50850 \begin_inset space ~
50856 \begin_inset space ~
50860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50862 reference "sec:Paths"
50866 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
50869 \begin_inset space ~
50875 The backup file has the file extension
50876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50890 \begin_layout Standard
50893 Backup documents, every
50895 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
50898 \begin_layout Standard
50901 Save documents compressed by default
50903 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
50904 \begin_inset space ~
50908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50910 reference "subsec:Compressed"
50915 This applies to newly created documents only.
50916 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
50919 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50920 Windows & work area
50923 \begin_layout Standard
50926 Open documents in tabs
50928 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
50932 \begin_layout Standard
50937 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
50942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50944 \begin_inset space ~
50948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50950 reference "sec:Paths"
50954 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
50961 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
50962 documents will be opened in the same running instance
50963 of \SpecialChar LyX
50965 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
50966 instance is created for each file.
50969 \begin_layout Standard
50972 Single close-tab button
50974 is checked, there will only be one close button (
50984 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
50985 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
50986 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
50990 \begin_layout Standard
50991 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50999 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
51000 before the change takes effect.
51008 \begin_layout Standard
51013 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
51015 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
51017 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
51021 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
51022 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
51023 and only want to close the view in once instance.
51026 \begin_layout Subsection
51028 \begin_inset Index idx
51031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51040 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
51047 \begin_layout Standard
51048 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
51052 \begin_layout Standard
51053 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51061 This section only deals with the fonts
51065 the \SpecialChar LyX
51067 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
51070 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51071 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51082 \begin_layout Standard
51083 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
51100 (depends on the system) as its
51103 \begin_inset space ~
51119 \begin_layout Standard
51120 You can change the font size with the
51127 \begin_layout Standard
51132 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
51134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51137 points have the size of 1
51138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51142 \begin_inset space ~
51146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51148 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
51153 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
51154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51158 The sizes are explained in detail in section
51159 \begin_inset space ~
51163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51165 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
51172 \begin_layout Subsection
51174 \begin_inset Index idx
51177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51178 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
51185 \begin_inset Index idx
51188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51197 \begin_layout Standard
51198 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
51199 by choosing an item in the
51200 list and selecting the
51207 \begin_layout Standard
51208 By checking the option
51212 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
51215 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
51216 \begin_inset space ~
51220 \begin_inset space ~
51225 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
51228 \begin_layout Subsection
51230 \begin_inset Index idx
51233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51242 \begin_layout Standard
51243 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
51247 \begin_layout Standard
51252 enables previewing snippets of your document.
51253 This feature is described in section
51254 \begin_inset space ~
51258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51260 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
51267 \begin_layout Standard
51268 Checking the option
51271 \begin_inset space ~
51275 \begin_inset space ~
51279 \begin_inset space ~
51284 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
51287 \begin_layout Section
51289 \begin_inset Index idx
51292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51301 \begin_layout Subsection
51305 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51309 \begin_layout Standard
51312 Cursor follows scrollbar
51314 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
51318 \begin_layout Standard
51319 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
51320 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
51321 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
51324 \begin_layout Standard
51327 Scroll below end of document
51329 is self-explanatory.
51332 \begin_layout Standard
51333 In \SpecialChar LyX
51334 one can jump from word to word by pressing
51341 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
51343 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
51344 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
51345 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
51349 \begin_layout Standard
51351 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
51354 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
51356 is only relevant in documents that
51361 In such documents, change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is
51370 markup) with this option selected.
51371 It the option is not selected, pasted text will be inserted without any
51373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51377 \begin_inset Quotes els
51381 \begin_inset Quotes ers
51385 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
51386 dissolving from insets.
51391 track changes, pasted text is
51396 \begin_inset Quotes els
51400 \begin_inset Quotes ers
51403 notwithstanding the state of this option.
51408 \begin_layout Standard
51411 Sort environments alphabetically
51413 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
51416 \begin_layout Standard
51419 Group environments by their category
51421 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
51424 \begin_layout Standard
51429 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
51438 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
51442 \begin_layout Standard
51444 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
51447 Search drive for cited files
51449 allows \SpecialChar LyX
51450 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
51453 \begin_inset space ~
51457 \begin_inset space ~
51461 \begin_inset space ~
51465 \begin_inset space ~
51468 Content\SpecialChar ldots
51471 context menu on a citation.
51475 \change_deleted 630872221 1622118829
51477 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
51480 field determines the search pattern.
51482 \begin_inset space ~
51486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51488 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
51497 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51501 \begin_layout Standard
51502 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
51507 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
51508 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
51512 \begin_layout Subsection
51514 \begin_inset Index idx
51517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51524 \begin_inset Index idx
51527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51528 Settings ! Shortcuts
51536 \begin_layout Standard
51541 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
51543 Several binding files are available, among them:
51546 \begin_layout Description
51547 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
51550 \begin_layout Description
51551 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
51563 \begin_layout Description
51564 mac.bind a set of bindings for
51567 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51575 \begin_layout Standard
51576 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
51581 , and binding files for special languages.
51582 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
51583 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51587 \begin_inset space \space{}
51591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51599 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
51600 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
51601 will try to use the appropriate binding
51605 \begin_layout Standard
51606 Some binding files, like
51610 , only have a limited scope.
51611 When looking at the end of the file
51615 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
51618 \begin_layout Standard
51622 \begin_inset space ~
51626 \begin_inset space ~
51631 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
51632 in the selected key binding file.
51635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51639 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
51644 \begin_inset Index idx
51647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51648 Key Bindings ! Editing
51656 \begin_layout Standard
51657 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
51658 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
51659 functions and the bound shortcuts.
51660 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
51663 Show key-bindings containing
51666 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
51667 Insert there for example as keyword
51668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51675 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
51676 functions that contain
51677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51685 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
51686 All \SpecialChar LyX
51687 functions are also listed in the file
51692 that you will find in the
51699 \begin_layout Standard
51700 For example, to add the shortcut
51708 , select the function and press the
51713 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
51714 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
51717 \begin_layout Standard
51718 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
51719 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
51724 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
51726 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
51731 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated
51734 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
51738 \begin_layout Standard
51739 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
51742 \begin_layout Standard
51743 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
51745 The syntax of the entries is:
51748 \begin_layout Standard
51754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51773 \begin_layout Standard
51774 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
51775 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
51776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51803 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
51804 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
51805 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
51806 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
51808 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
51812 , you needed to specify it as
51817 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
51820 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
51823 \begin_layout Subsection
51825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51827 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
51832 \begin_inset Index idx
51835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51842 \begin_inset Index idx
51845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51846 Settings ! Keyboard Map
51854 \begin_layout Standard
51855 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
51856 For the case where this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
51857 provides keyboard maps.
51858 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
51859 is a Romanian one, you can enable
51862 \begin_inset space ~
51866 \begin_inset space ~
51871 and select the keyboard map file named
51878 \begin_layout Standard
51887 keyboard map and, if you use the
51891 bindings, you can select the first and second with
51894 arg "keymap-primary"
51900 arg "keymap-secondary"
51903 respectively or toggle between them with
51906 arg "keymap-toggle"
51912 \begin_layout Standard
51913 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51921 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
51930 \begin_layout Standard
51931 You can also specify the mouse
51933 Wheel scrolling speed
51936 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
51940 Middle mouse button pasting
51942 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
51943 inserts the content of the clipboard.
51946 \begin_layout Standard
51954 \begin_inset space ~
51958 \begin_inset space ~
51963 you can select a key for zooming.
51964 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
51967 \begin_layout Subsection
51971 \begin_layout Standard
51972 Input completion is described in section
51973 \begin_inset space ~
51977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51979 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
51986 \begin_layout Section
51988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51995 \begin_inset Index idx
51998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52005 \begin_inset Index idx
52008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52017 \begin_layout Standard
52018 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
52019 are normally determined during
52021 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
52024 \begin_layout Description
52026 \begin_inset space ~
52029 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
52030 's working directory.
52031 It is the default when you
52042 \begin_inset space ~
52050 \begin_layout Description
52052 \begin_inset space ~
52055 templates This directory
52056 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
52057 contains the templates that are shown
52058 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
52059 will be opened when you use the menu
52060 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
52065 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52067 \begin_inset space ~
52071 \begin_inset space ~
52079 \begin_layout Description
52081 \begin_inset space ~
52084 files This directory
52085 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
52086 will be opened when you use the
52087 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
52088 contains the example files that are listed in
52091 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
52100 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52102 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
52104 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
52110 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
52112 \begin_inset Newline newline
52116 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
52119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52128 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
52129 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
52139 \begin_layout Description
52141 \begin_inset space ~
52145 \begin_inset Index idx
52148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52154 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
52155 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
52156 \begin_inset space ~
52160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52162 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
52170 will be used to save the backups.
52171 \begin_inset Newline newline
52174 Backup files have the ending
52175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52185 \begin_layout Description
52187 \begin_inset space ~
52190 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
52191 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
52193 \begin_inset Newline newline
52200 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52206 You can edit this file with the program
52215 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
52216 in its preferences under
52219 \begin_inset space ~
52225 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
52230 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
52232 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
52233 in your \SpecialChar LyX
52239 and \SpecialChar LyX
52240 need to be running the same time.
52241 \begin_inset Newline newline
52244 The pipe is also used for the
52248 feature, see section
52249 \begin_inset space ~
52253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52255 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
52260 \begin_inset Newline newline
52263 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
52264 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
52265 \begin_inset Newline newline
52281 \begin_layout Description
52283 \begin_inset space ~
52286 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
52289 \begin_layout Description
52291 \begin_inset space ~
52294 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
52295 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
52296 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
52299 \begin_layout Description
52301 \begin_inset space ~
52304 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
52310 You only need to specify it if you are using
52314 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
52316 For \SpecialChar LyX
52321 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
52325 \begin_layout Description
52327 \begin_inset space ~
52330 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
52331 When \SpecialChar LyX
52332 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
52333 to find it on the system.
52334 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
52336 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
52338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52345 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
52346 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
52349 \begin_layout Description
52351 \begin_inset space ~
52354 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
52355 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
52356 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
52357 code or in the document
52359 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
52361 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
52362 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
52363 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
52364 scanned for the input files.
52365 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
52366 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
52368 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
52369 compilation may fail for some documents.
52372 \begin_layout Section
52376 \begin_layout Standard
52377 Here you can insert your
52386 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
52388 \begin_inset space ~
52392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52394 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
52398 , to mark changes you make as yours.
52401 \begin_layout Section
52403 \begin_inset Index idx
52406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52407 Language ! Settings
52413 \begin_inset Index idx
52416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52417 Settings ! Language
52425 \begin_layout Subsection
52427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52429 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
52436 \begin_layout Description
52438 \begin_inset space ~
52442 \begin_inset space ~
52445 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
52447 You can find its actual translation status here:
52448 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52450 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
52456 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
52460 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52462 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
52463 LaTeX Language Support
52468 \begin_layout Description
52470 \begin_inset space ~
52473 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
52474 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
52475 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
52476 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
52477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52493 The most widespread language package is
52498 \begin_inset Index idx
52501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52508 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
52510 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
52511 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
52512 come with the alternative
52518 \begin_inset Index idx
52521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52523 packages ! polyglossia
52528 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
52529 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
52535 The available selections are described in section
52536 \begin_inset space ~
52540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52542 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
52549 \begin_layout Description
52551 \begin_inset space ~
52555 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
52556 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
52557 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
52559 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
52563 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
52567 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
52569 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
52573 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
52574 that is used to switch to a different language
52575 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
52576 to start the package
52580 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
52581 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
52585 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
52586 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
52589 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
52593 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
52601 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
52609 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
52612 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
52614 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
52618 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
52636 selectlanguage{$$lang}
52637 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
52644 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
52645 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52650 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
52655 , this setting is ignored.
52660 \begin_layout Description
52662 \begin_inset space ~
52666 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
52673 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
52674 Use this if the language switch set in
52678 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
52682 's alternative command
52686 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
52687 \SpecialChar allowbreak
52690 end{otherlanguage*}
52694 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
52695 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
52696 command toggles the package on and off
52697 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
52698 Empty by default, as
52702 selectlanguage{$$lang}
52704 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
52709 selectlanguage{$$lang}
52715 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
52720 , this setting is ignored.
52725 \begin_layout Description
52727 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
52729 \begin_inset space ~
52733 \begin_inset space ~
52736 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
52740 \begin_layout Description
52742 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
52744 \begin_inset space ~
52748 \begin_inset space ~
52751 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
52757 \begin_layout Description
52759 \begin_inset space ~
52763 \begin_inset space ~
52767 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
52769 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
52772 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
52773 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
52776 to the document class options
52777 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
52778 rather than the language package options.
52779 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
52783 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
52784 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
52786 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
52787 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
52789 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
52794 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
52795 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
52804 \begin_layout Description
52806 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
52808 \begin_inset space ~
52812 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
52814 \begin_inset space ~
52818 \begin_inset space ~
52822 \begin_inset space ~
52828 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
52830 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
52833 this option is set,
52834 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
52835 the language switch defined in
52838 \begin_inset space ~
52843 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
52844 to the document language.
52845 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
52846 This might be needed if you use a non-default
52849 \begin_inset space ~
52854 or if a package resets the document language.
52855 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
52856 usually should be the document language).
52857 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
52858 documents start with the chosen document language.
52859 When this option is not set, the
52862 \begin_inset space ~
52867 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52869 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
52872 \begin_inset space ~
52882 \begin_layout Description
52884 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
52886 \begin_inset space ~
52890 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
52892 \begin_inset space ~
52896 \begin_inset space ~
52900 \begin_inset space ~
52906 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
52910 \begin_inset space ~
52914 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
52915 Set document language explicitly
52921 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
52923 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
52929 \begin_inset space ~
52935 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
52937 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
52941 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
52943 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
52946 the end of the document.
52947 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
52951 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52952 \paragraph_spacing single
52954 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
52960 \begin_layout Description
52962 \begin_inset space ~
52966 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
52968 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
52972 \begin_inset space ~
52976 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
52978 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
52980 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
52984 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
52987 in a language different
52988 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
52990 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
52993 the document language will be
52994 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
52995 marked (by default with a blue
52998 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
53000 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
53004 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
53008 \begin_layout Description
53010 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
53012 \begin_inset space ~
53016 \begin_inset space ~
53020 \begin_inset space ~
53023 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
53024 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
53025 switched via the operating system.
53026 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
53028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53031 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
53032 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
53037 \begin_layout Description
53039 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
53041 \begin_inset space ~
53045 \begin_inset space ~
53048 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
53049 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
53054 \begin_layout Description
53056 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
53058 \begin_inset space ~
53062 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
53064 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
53068 \begin_inset space ~
53072 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
53073 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
53074 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
53076 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
53080 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
53082 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
53083 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
53085 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
53086 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
53087 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
53089 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
53094 \begin_layout Standard
53099 means that the cursor
53100 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
53101 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
53102 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
53104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53107 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
53108 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
53112 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
53114 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
53115 specific case always means: move
53119 in text (even if this means:
53125 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
53126 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
53127 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
53128 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
53129 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
53130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53141 \begin_layout Standard
53143 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
53148 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
53149 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
53150 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
53154 ) when coming from the left.
53155 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
53157 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
53158 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
53159 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
53164 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53166 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
53170 \begin_layout Description
53172 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
53174 \begin_inset space ~
53178 \begin_inset space ~
53181 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
53182 separator alignment).
53183 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
53185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53188 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
53189 (static) custom character here.
53192 \begin_layout Description
53194 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
53196 \begin_inset space ~
53200 \begin_inset space ~
53203 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
53209 \begin_layout Subsection
53213 \begin_layout Standard
53214 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
53215 \begin_inset space ~
53219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53221 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
53228 \begin_layout Section
53232 \begin_layout Subsection
53234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53236 name "subsec:General-output"
53243 \begin_layout Description
53245 \begin_inset space ~
53248 search Commands that will be used for the menu
53250 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
53252 \begin_inset space ~
53258 For a detailed description see section
53260 Reverse DVI/PDF search
53265 \begin_inset space ~
53273 \begin_layout Description
53275 \begin_inset space ~
53278 Options Options for the program
53282 that is used for the export format
53287 \begin_inset space ~
53291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53293 reference "subsec:Export"
53298 Possible options are listed in the
53303 \begin_inset Newline newline
53307 \begin_inset Flex URL
53310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53312 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
53322 \begin_layout Description
53324 \begin_inset space ~
53328 \begin_inset space ~
53331 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
53334 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
53335 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
53337 \begin_inset space ~
53343 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
53346 \begin_layout Description
53348 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
53350 \begin_inset space ~
53354 \begin_inset Index idx
53357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53364 \begin_inset Index idx
53367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53368 Settings ! Date format
53373 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
53374 \begin_inset Newline newline
53378 \begin_inset Flex URL
53381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53383 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
53389 \begin_inset Newline newline
53392 For example the format
53393 \begin_inset Newline newline
53397 \begin_inset Newline newline
53400 prints the date as day/month/year.
53405 \begin_layout Description
53407 \begin_inset space ~
53411 \begin_inset space ~
53414 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
53415 is allowed to overwrite on export.
53418 \begin_layout Subsection
53424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53426 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
53431 \begin_inset Index idx
53434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53435 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
53444 \begin_layout Description
53446 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
53448 \begin_inset space ~
53456 \begin_inset space ~
53460 \begin_inset space ~
53463 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
53468 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
53489 are used for Cyrillic.
53490 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
53491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53503 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
53505 sets up in the background.
53506 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
53511 \begin_layout Description
53513 \begin_inset space ~
53517 \begin_inset space ~
53521 \begin_inset space ~
53525 \begin_inset space ~
53528 options They only have an effect when the program
53532 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
53535 \begin_layout Standard
53536 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
53537 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
53538 manuals of the applications.
53541 \begin_layout Description
53543 \begin_inset space ~
53546 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
53547 \begin_inset space ~
53551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53553 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
53560 \begin_layout Description
53562 \begin_inset space ~
53565 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
53566 \begin_inset space ~
53570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53572 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
53579 \begin_layout Description
53581 \begin_inset space ~
53584 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
53585 \begin_inset space ~
53589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53591 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
53598 \begin_layout Description
53604 \begin_inset space ~
53607 command Command for the program
53609 Check\SpecialChar TeX
53612 that is described in the section
53614 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
53619 Additional Features
53624 \begin_layout Standard
53625 There are additionally the following options:
53628 \begin_layout Description
53630 \begin_inset space ~
53634 \begin_inset space ~
53638 \begin_inset space ~
53642 \begin_inset space ~
53647 \begin_inset space ~
53650 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
53651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53668 to separate folders.
53669 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
53671 \begin_inset Index idx
53674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53681 \begin_inset Index idx
53684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53693 \begin_layout Description
53695 \begin_inset space ~
53699 \begin_inset space ~
53703 \begin_inset space ~
53707 \begin_inset space ~
53711 \begin_inset space ~
53715 \begin_inset space ~
53718 changes Removes all manually set
53724 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53725 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
53727 \begin_inset space ~
53732 dialog when changing the document class.
53735 \begin_layout Section
53737 \begin_inset space ~
53741 \begin_inset Index idx
53744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53753 \begin_layout Subsection
53755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53757 name "subsec:Converters"
53762 \begin_inset Index idx
53765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53774 \begin_layout Standard
53775 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
53776 from one format to another.
53777 You can modify converters or create new ones.
53778 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
53785 \begin_inset space ~
53790 field and press the
53795 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
53799 \begin_inset space ~
53804 drop-down list, modify the
53808 field and press the
53815 \begin_layout Standard
53818 Converter File Cache
53824 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
53826 Maximum Age (in days
53829 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
53830 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
53833 \begin_layout Standard
53834 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
53835 definition, is described in the section
53846 \begin_layout Subsection
53848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53850 name "sec:File-Formats"
53855 \begin_inset Index idx
53858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53865 \begin_inset Index idx
53868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53877 \begin_layout Standard
53878 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
53888 programs that should be used for certain formats.
53891 \begin_layout Standard
53892 You can also define the
53894 Default output format
53896 that is used when you use
53898 View, Update, View Master Document
53902 Update Master Document
53908 menu or the toolbar.
53911 \begin_layout Standard
53912 More about formats and their options is described in the section
53923 \begin_layout Standard
53924 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
53926 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
53927 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
53928 This is done by specifying a
53933 More about this is described in the section
53944 \begin_layout Chapter
53945 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
53947 \begin_inset Index idx
53950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53959 name "chap:Units-available-in"
53966 \begin_layout Standard
53968 \begin_inset space ~
53972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53974 reference "tab:Units"
53978 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
53979 and used in this documentation.
53982 \begin_layout Standard
53983 \begin_inset Float table
53990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53991 \begin_inset Caption Standard
53993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54009 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
54015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54017 \begin_inset Tabular
54018 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
54019 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
54020 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
54021 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
54022 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
54024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54175 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
54179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54446 scaled point (65536
54447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54451 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54514 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
54519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54638 % of original image width
54643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54727 \begin_layout Standard
54728 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54731 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
54738 \begin_layout Bibliography
54739 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54740 LatexCommand bibitem
54747 The \SpecialChar LyX
54749 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54752 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
54758 \begin_inset Newline newline
54762 \begin_inset Flex URL
54765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54767 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
54775 \begin_layout Bibliography
54776 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54777 LatexCommand bibitem
54778 key "latexcompanion"
54783 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
54785 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
54786 Companion Second Edition.
54789 Addison-Wesley, 2004
54792 \begin_layout Bibliography
54793 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54794 LatexCommand bibitem
54800 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
54803 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
54807 Addison-Wesley, 2003
54810 \begin_layout Bibliography
54811 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54812 LatexCommand bibitem
54821 : A Document Preparation System.
54824 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
54827 \begin_layout Bibliography
54828 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54829 LatexCommand bibitem
54839 The \SpecialChar TeX
54843 Addison-Wesley, 1984
54846 \begin_layout Bibliography
54847 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54848 LatexCommand bibitem
54854 The \SpecialChar TeX
54856 \begin_inset Newline newline
54860 \begin_inset Flex URL
54863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54865 https://ctan.org/topic
54873 \begin_layout Bibliography
54874 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54875 LatexCommand bibitem
54881 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
54883 \begin_inset Newline newline
54887 \begin_inset Flex URL
54890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54892 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
54900 \begin_layout Bibliography
54901 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54902 LatexCommand bibitem
54909 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54911 name "Documentation"
54912 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
54919 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54923 \begin_inset Newline newline
54927 \begin_inset Flex URL
54930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54932 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
54940 \begin_layout Bibliography
54941 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54942 LatexCommand bibitem
54949 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54951 name "Documentation"
54952 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
54957 how to use the program
54959 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54963 \begin_inset Newline newline
54967 \begin_inset Flex URL
54970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54972 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
54980 \begin_layout Bibliography
54981 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54982 LatexCommand bibitem
54989 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54991 name "Documentation"
54992 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
54997 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55003 \begin_inset Index idx
55006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55008 packages ! biblatex
55014 \begin_inset Newline newline
55018 \begin_inset Flex URL
55021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55023 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
55031 \begin_layout Bibliography
55032 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55033 LatexCommand bibitem
55040 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55042 name "Documentation"
55043 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
55048 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55054 \begin_inset Index idx
55057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55065 \begin_inset Newline newline
55069 \begin_inset Flex URL
55072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55074 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
55082 \begin_layout Bibliography
55083 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55084 LatexCommand bibitem
55091 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55093 name "Documentation"
55094 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
55104 \begin_inset Newline newline
55108 \begin_inset Flex URL
55111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55113 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
55121 \begin_layout Bibliography
55122 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55123 LatexCommand bibitem
55124 key "makeindex-man"
55130 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55133 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
55143 \begin_inset Newline newline
55147 \begin_inset Flex URL
55150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55152 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
55160 \begin_layout Bibliography
55161 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55162 LatexCommand bibitem
55169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55171 name "Documentation"
55172 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
55182 \begin_inset Newline newline
55186 \begin_inset Flex URL
55189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55191 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
55199 \begin_layout Bibliography
55200 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55201 LatexCommand bibitem
55208 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55210 name "Documentation"
55211 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
55216 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
55218 \begin_inset Newline newline
55222 \begin_inset Flex URL
55225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55227 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
55235 \begin_layout Bibliography
55236 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55237 LatexCommand bibitem
55244 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55246 name "Documentation"
55247 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
55252 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55258 \begin_inset Index idx
55261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55269 \begin_inset Newline newline
55273 \begin_inset Flex URL
55276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55278 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
55286 \begin_layout Bibliography
55287 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55288 LatexCommand bibitem
55295 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55297 name "Documentation"
55298 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
55303 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55309 \begin_inset Index idx
55312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55314 packages ! enumitem
55320 \begin_inset Newline newline
55324 \begin_inset Flex URL
55327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55329 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
55337 \begin_layout Bibliography
55338 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55339 LatexCommand bibitem
55346 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55348 name "Documentation"
55349 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
55354 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55360 \begin_inset Index idx
55363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55365 packages ! fancyhdr
55371 \begin_inset Newline newline
55375 \begin_inset Flex URL
55378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55380 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
55388 \begin_layout Bibliography
55389 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55390 LatexCommand bibitem
55397 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55399 name "Documentation"
55400 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
55405 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55411 \begin_inset Index idx
55414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55416 packages ! hyperref
55422 \begin_inset Newline newline
55426 \begin_inset Flex URL
55429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55431 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
55439 \begin_layout Bibliography
55440 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55441 LatexCommand bibitem
55448 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55450 name "Documentation"
55451 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
55456 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55462 \begin_inset Index idx
55465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55467 packages ! microtype
55473 \begin_inset Newline newline
55477 \begin_inset Flex URL
55480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55482 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
55490 \begin_layout Bibliography
55491 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55492 LatexCommand bibitem
55499 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55501 name "Documentation"
55502 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
55507 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55513 \begin_inset Index idx
55516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55524 \begin_inset Newline newline
55528 \begin_inset Flex URL
55531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55533 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
55541 \begin_layout Bibliography
55542 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55543 LatexCommand bibitem
55550 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55552 name "Documentation"
55553 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
55558 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55564 \begin_inset Index idx
55567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55569 packages ! prettyref
55575 \begin_inset Newline newline
55579 \begin_inset Flex URL
55582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55584 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
55592 \begin_layout Bibliography
55593 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55594 LatexCommand bibitem
55601 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55603 name "Documentation"
55604 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
55609 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55615 \begin_inset Index idx
55618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55620 packages ! refstyle
55626 \begin_inset Newline newline
55630 \begin_inset Flex URL
55633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55635 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
55643 \begin_layout Bibliography
55644 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55645 LatexCommand bibitem
55652 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55655 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
55660 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55662 \begin_inset Newline newline
55666 \begin_inset Flex URL
55669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55671 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
55679 \begin_layout Bibliography
55680 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55681 LatexCommand bibitem
55688 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55691 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
55696 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55698 \begin_inset Newline newline
55702 \begin_inset Flex URL
55705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55707 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
55715 \begin_layout Bibliography
55716 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55717 LatexCommand bibitem
55724 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55727 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
55732 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55733 for Cyrillic languages:
55734 \begin_inset Newline newline
55738 \begin_inset Flex URL
55741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55743 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
55751 \begin_layout Bibliography
55752 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55753 LatexCommand bibitem
55760 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55763 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
55768 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55770 \begin_inset Newline newline
55774 \begin_inset Flex URL
55777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55779 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
55787 \begin_layout Bibliography
55788 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55789 LatexCommand bibitem
55796 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55799 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
55804 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55806 \begin_inset Newline newline
55810 \begin_inset Flex URL
55813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55815 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
55823 \begin_layout Bibliography
55824 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55825 LatexCommand bibitem
55832 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55835 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
55840 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55842 \begin_inset Newline newline
55846 \begin_inset Flex URL
55849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55851 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
55859 \begin_layout Standard
55860 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
55867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55894 \begin_inset Note Note
55897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55904 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
55905 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
55906 bibliography is the second one:
55914 \begin_layout Standard
55915 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
55916 LatexCommand bibtex
55917 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
55918 options "biblio/alphadin"
55925 \begin_layout Standard
55926 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
55930 \begin_layout Standard
55934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55940 pagedeclaration}[1]{
55943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55949 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
55957 \begin_inset Note Note
55960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55961 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
55962 \begin_inset space ~
55966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55968 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
55980 \begin_layout Standard
55981 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
55982 LatexCommand printnomenclature
55988 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
55989 LatexCommand printindex